April 25, 2017 | Author: Sourabh Arora | Category: N/A
Download ML-1001 R400 Rev 03.1 Student Course Book...
Automation College
MasterLogic: Fundamentals - 200R Implementation
ML-1001 R400 Student Guide Rev 03.1 04/2012 Book 1 of 1
.
Notices While this information is presented in good faith and believed to be accurate, Honeywell assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this courseware. The courseware is presented on an “as-is” basis. Honeywell disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, and makes no express warranties except as may be stated in its written agreement with and for its customer. In no event is Honeywell liable to anyone for any indirect, special or consequential damages even if Honeywell is informed of the possibility of these damages. The information and specifications in this courseware are subject to change without notice. No part of this courseware may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means. It is intended for the use of the original purchaser only. Copying, duplicating, selling or otherwise distributing the courseware is a violation of law. The materials and workbooks comprising the courseware may not, in whole or part, be copied, photocopied, reproduced, translated or reduced to any electronic medium or machine-readable form without prior consent in writing from Honeywell. This courseware is the confidential and proprietary information of Honeywell. The courseware may only be used by the person who attended the Honeywell class. The courseware may only be used in conjunction with a Honeywell system at the company that paid for the class. Only Honeywell may use the courseware for training purposes. This class has special equipment configurations that are appropriate only for training and should not be used for any other purpose. Experion, Da Vinci, IntelliMap, MXOpen, MXProLine, TotalPlant, PlantScape, TDC 3000, Uniformance, and Universal Control Network are registered trademarks of Honeywell International. These commodities, technology or software were exported from the United States in accordance with the Export Administration Regulations. Division contrary to U.S. law prohibited.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell Inc.
Honeywell International, Inc. Automation College Global Learning Services
Program Objectives ML1001R400 - MasterLogic (ML) 200 Implementation Tab 1
Lesson Orientation and Course Introduction
2
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
3
MasterLogic Software Introduction
4
Additional MasterLogic Software Options
5
MasterLogic Programming Languages
6
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
Objectives Course Introduction Describe the Purpose, Use and Value of ML200R Describe the ML200R Controller Architecture Describe Memory Types, their Addressing and Retention Describe the ML200R Controller Redundancy Describe the ML200R I/O Modules Describe the ML200R Special Modules Describe the ML200R Interface Modules Identify the ML200R System Components Verify the ML200R System Connections Describe SoftMaster Features and Installation Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software Describe the Configuration of Basic Parameters Describe the Configuration of IO Parameters Describe the Configuration of Redundancy Parameters Describe the Basics of Project Describe simulation in SoftMaster Configure ML200R using SoftMaster Describe the Import/Export Option Describe the Compare Project Option Describe the System Requirements of Other Software Describe the different Programming Languages Describe a Typical Control Logic Statement Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster Create and Implement Analog Control Logic Using SoftMaster Create Program Using ST Create Program Using SFC Create User Defined Function / Function Blocks Create User Defined Data Types Describe Network Manager within SoftMaster Describe FENet Configuration Describe SNet Configuration Describe Profibus Interface Configuration Using Sycon Describe DeviceNet Interface configuration using SYCON Configure the Profibus communication Page: 1 of 2
04/19/12
Program Objectives 7
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
8
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
9
Experion Integration
10
Monitoring MasterLogic Status in Station
11
LM-ML Migration Support
12
MasterLogic TroubleShooting
13
Reference
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
Describe MODBUS Describe the High Speed Link Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication Configure a MODBUS Server Configure a MODBUS Client Configure the High Speed Link Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster Describe Various Online Functionalities in NM Describe Various Monitoring Options in SoftMaster Describe Various Debugging Options in SoftMaster Describe Software Required for Experion Integration Difference between ML Server on Experion PKS and LS Describe ML Server Software Licensing with EXP PKS Describe ML Server Configuration for EXP Integration Install ML Server Software on Experion Get an ML Server License for Experion PKS Install ML Server License on Experion PKS Configure ML Server for Experion Integration Configure MasterLogic Interface in QuickBuilder Describe MasterLogic System Display in Station Monitor Communication Status of ML Server Interface Monitor MasterLogic Status using Experion Station Describe the LM to ML Migration Describe Controller Diagnostics Describe IO Diagnostics Describe Diagnostics on Interface Modules Describe the ML200R SMART IO Modules Describe Basics of Ladder Programming Create a User Defined Function Block to Scale Analog Input Display the Temperature Value in BCD Display
Page: 2 of 2
04/19/12
1
Course Introduction
Orientation and Course Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Course Introduction 2/2/2012
1
Honeywell
Introduction • The MasterLogic(ML)200R Implementation course provides the end user with the ability to:
SoftMaster PLC Engineering tool
MasterLogic PLCs
– Plan an ML200R System – Configure the ML200R System – Configure the open networks supported by the ML200R System – Understand and Implement the Integration of ML200R to an Experion Server
Orientation and Course Introduction
Smart Remote I/Os Local Panel Touch Screen Panel
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
2
1
Course Introduction 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Who Should Attend
• This course is designed for ML200R System implementers responsible for designing and/or configuring the system. These individuals include: – System Engineers or Application Engineers who are asked to configure the ML200R PLC and add to or change the PLC configuration – Others, whose job functions include performing these tasks
Orientation and Course Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
3
Course Introduction 2/2/2012
Honeywell
What You Will Learn • In this course, you will learn how to:
– Recognize the role of the major hardware and software components and learn data processing techniques of the ML200R PLC – Use the SoftMaster software tool to Program and Debug the ML200R System – Configure the PLC Input-Output modules and bases – Configure Open Networks supported by the ML200R – Configure Channels, Controllers and Points in the Experion PKS System
Orientation and Course Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4
2
Course Introduction 2/2/2012
1 Honeywell
What You Will Not Learn • In this course, we will not cover: – Experion System Design and Implementation
– Explanation and functionality of Open Networks (eg: Profibus, Devicenet, etc.)
Orientation and Course Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
5
Course Introduction 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Course Organization
• The MasterLogic(ML)200R Implementation course is divided into the following thirteen sections: – Section 1 - Course Orientation – Section 2 - MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation • Explains about ML200R architecture, as a controller and as part of an Experion System – Section 3 - MasterLogic Software Introduction • Explains about SoftMaster which is a MaterLogic software tool – Section 4 - about Additional MasterLogic Software Options • Explains about Import/Export, compare project options in Softmaster and Sycon software – Section 5 - MasterLogic Programming Software • It enhances the students’ knowledge about IEC 61131-3 based languages used in the ML200R PLC
Orientation and Course Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
6
3
Course Introduction 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Course Organization (Continued)
– Section 6 and 7 - MasterLogic Communication Protocols • Explains the various communication practices implemented in the ML200R System such as MODBUS and Profibus communication – Section 8 - explains about the Online Functions Available in SoftMaster – Section 9 - Experion Integration • The ML200R interface to the Experion System is explained and practiced in this section – Section 10 - Monitoring MasterLogic Status in Station • Describes the ML system displays in Experion Station – Section 11 - LM-ML Migration Support • Provides basic information about the LM-ML migration procedure – Section 12 - provides information about MasterLogic Troubleshooting Practices – Section 13 - for Reference • Includes additional information about Ladder Programming • Contains hands on exercises which can be referred for additional information on Function Blocks and displaying controller data on displays Orientation and Course Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
7
Course Introduction 2/2/2012
Honeywell
This page intentionally left blank
Orientation and Course Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
8
4
Course Introduction 2/2/2012
1
Describe the Purpose, Use and Value of ML200R
Orientation and Course Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
9
Describe the Purpose, Use and Value of ML200R 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Purpose of MasterLogic PLC
• MasterLogic200R is the next generation Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) from Honeywell – It is a part of the Experion System – It adds power and robustness to batch control capabilities of the Experion Network – It is compact, powerful and versatile – Logic Manager (LM) can be migrated to MasterLogic(ML)
Orientation and Course Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
10
5
Describe the Purpose, Use and Value of ML200R 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Use and Value of MasterLogic PLC • The MasterLogic or ML is a cost-effective solution for: – Fast Logic Execution – Sequential Applications and – Batch Control Applications
• MasterLogic Dedicated Protocol (MLDP) integration with Experion Server (explained later) – Reduces engineering time – Brings in ML status alarms to Experion System Status Display
Orientation and Course Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
11
Describe the Purpose, Use and Value of ML200R 2/2/2012
Honeywell
This page intentionally left blank
Orientation and Course Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
12
6
Describe the Purpose, Use and Value of ML200R 2/2/2012
2
Describe the ML200R Controller Architecture
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Describe the ML200R Controller Architecture 2/2/2012
1
Honeywell
Introduction Third Party SCADA
Experion PKS Servers Process & SCADA
Experion HS\LS
F T E
F T E
C300
C200
Experion Stations
F T E
F T E
SIL-3 Safety PLC
F T E
SoftMaster-200 PLC Engineering
F T E
F T E
Peer-to-Peer MODBUS-TCP
F T E
F T E
Peer-to-Peer ESVT
APP
Rail I/O
Wireless Devices
MasterLogic PLCs
PM I/O
Direct integration with TPS
TPS, TDC2000, TDC3000 (Investment Protection)
Digital Video Manager
Smart Remote I/Os
SCADA Devices (OPC, Modbus)
Local Panel Touch Screen Panel
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
2
1
Describe the ML200R Controller Architecture 2/2/2012
Honeywell
MasterLogic - Experion Architectural Features •
MasterLogic (ML) PLC is one of the controllers in Experion architecture
•
Power Supply Modules are available to accept 110V/230V AC with 5.5A and 8.5A, and 24V DC voltage with 7.5A
•
MLDP (MasterLogic Dedicated Protocol) server is embedded in the FENet Module of the Master Logic System
– It provides a seamless integration with the Experion Server
– Experion Server can access ML200R memory areas through MLDP – MLDP saves engineering time – Allows better memory access
•
Fast Ethernet Communication (FEnet) Modules of the ML200R System reside on the Fault Tolerant Ethernet (FTE) Network
– FEnet provides a high-level interface with Experion PKS Servers – It enables Peer-to-Peer Communication with other controllers in the Experion Architecture • Peer Control Data Interface is used for Peer to Peer Communication with other controllers in the Experion Architecture
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
3
Describe the ML200R Controller Architecture 2/2/2012
Honeywell
MasterLogic to Experion Interface
• FEnet enables efficient integration between C300 and MasterLogic 200R PLC Controllers – Fast Ethernet at 100mbps
• Three levels of redundancy are implemented in the ML200R – Redundant PLC – Two Ethernet modules (FEnet) – Redundant Experion PKS Server
• IEC Data types are supported by the ML200R System – Ex: BOOL, BYTE, WORD, INT etc
• Analog Input failure in the ML200R sets the PV status to BAD for corresponding points in Experion using MLDP protocol
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4
2
Describe the ML200R Controller Architecture 2/2/2012
•
ML200R uses built-in Scaling functionality available in Experion for configuration and maintenance
•
Clock Synchronization can be configured between Experion Server and MasterLogic PLCs
– This also makes engineer’s work more comfortable
– Experion Server acts as a Master and periodically monitors the RTC (Real Time Clock) parameters of all MasterLogic PLCs in the same network – When drift between two clocks exceeds configured limits, PLC clock is synchronized with Experion Server
•
MasterLogic PLC supports Sequence of Events (SOE) reporting
•
DI SOE module is also available for SOE reporting
•
MaterLogic PLC alarms and events can be archived in Experion
•
Experion Server sends a heart beat signal to all MasterLogic PLCs
– A status indicating bit is configured as an SOE variable in the ML200R – The status of this variable can be viewed in the SOE display in Experion – It is dedicated I/O module
– These alarms are consolidated with the Experion System alarms and events – The heart beat signal is a communication health status indicator
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Describe the ML200R Controller Architecture 2/2/2012
5
Honeywell
MasterLogic to Experion Interface Architecture Experion Server Quick Builder -ML PLC Channel -ML PLC Controller -Points Configured
MLDP Point Builder Utility
Quick Builder Database
FTE
FTE
Experion Stations (Flex / Console) -PLC System Status -Graphics -PLC Alarms
HCI Server for ML PLC
Dual Ethernet
Dual Ethernet
Dual Ethernet
Dual Ethernet
MasterLogic Deticated protocol
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
6
3
Describe the ML200R Controller Architecture 2/2/2012
2
Honeywell
MasterLogic to Experion Interface (Continued)
Describe Memory Types, their Addressing and Retention
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Memory Types, their Addressing and Retention
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
2/2/2012
7
Honeywell
CPU Memory Overview • CPU Memory Overview Memory Type
Memory Size
Remarks
Built in Flash Memory
16 MB
Used for Program Backup
Program Memory
3 MB
Program execution, upload and system parameters
System Memory
4 MB
System data and parameter area
Data Memory
2MB
Direct and Symbolic variables
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Memory Types, their Addressing and Retention
8
4
2/2/2012
•
Honeywell
Data Memory Overview
Memory area System area: • I/O data table • Forced I/O table • Reserved area
Flag area
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Memory Size
770 KB
System Flag (%F)
4 KB
Analog Image Flag
8 KB
PID Flag (%K)
16 KB
High Speed Link Flag (%L)
22 KB
P2P Flag (%N)
42 KB
Input image area (%I)
16 KB
Output image area (%Q)
16 KB
R area (%R or %W)
128 KB max.
Direct parameter area (%M)
256 KB
Symbolic parameter area (%A)
512 KB
Analog Data Register (%U)
32KB
Stack area
256 KB
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Memory Types, their Addressing and Retention
2/2/2012
9
Honeywell
Retain Memory Area Settings • Retain Memory Area Configuration Parameter:
– It is used to configure memory Variables as Retain Memory Area Variable. • Hold the previous process values for variables during PLC restart and Power Failure Memory Area
Retainable (Yes/No)
Comments
%A
Yes
Can be configured as retainable memory area optionally. User must select the Retain check box, while creating the new variable
%M
Yes
Maximum of 128 KB can be configured as retain memory area. User must select the address range which can be retainable in the Basic parameters
%K
Yes
%L
Yes
%N
Yes
%R and %W
Yes
%I
No
%Q
No
%U
No
Always retainable since they are System parameter variables. No specific configuration is needed Always retainable. No specific configuration is needed
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Memory Types, their Addressing and Retention
10
5
2/2/2012
2
Data Memory Overview
Honeywell
Memory Area, Reset functions and Cold / Warm Restart
• Retain Variables: Configured to hold the previous data value during warm restart of PLC using the reset function and power failure of PLC. • Data of Retain Variables can be cleared using: – D.CLR Switch from CPU – Holding Reset Switch on CPU for more than 3 sec. – Using Overall reset function from SoftMaster • Note: When we reset Master CPU, Standby CPU also gets reset CPU Reset
Data Clear (DCLR)
Reset Normal Memory (Direct/Symb) Cold Restart Mode
Clear
Battery Fail
Power Fail
All Clear (3Sec)
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Retain Memory
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
%W (%R)
Hold
Hold
Hold
Clear
Hold
Clear
Flash Memory (Data)
Hold
Hold
Hold
Hold
Hold
Hold
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Retain Memory
Hold
Clear
Clear
Clear
Hold
Clear
%W (%R)
Hold
Hold
Hold
Clear
Hold
Clear
Flash Memory (Data)
Hold
Hold
Hold
Hold
Hold
Hold
Normal Memory (Direct/Symb) Warm Restart Mode
Overall Reset
* Data clear (DCLR) operation is available only on “CPU STOP” mode MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Memory Types, their Addressing and Retention
2/2/2012
11
Direct and Symbolic Variables •
Honeywell
Direct Variable : Variables which are accessed by using standard IEC Addressing Notations – Can be configured with or without variable names – Can be accessed using hardware reference or register reference
•
Symbolic Variable: Variables which do not use standard IEC Addressing Notations – Configured with variable name (Can be referenced only by variable name) Data Access Expression
Direct Variable
Symbolic Variable
Type / Range
Size
Comm. with ext. Device
Sharing with Int. programs
Input
%I XX.X.X
%IX0.0.0 ~ 127.15.63
16KB
Y
Y
Output
%Q XX.X.X
%QX0.0.0 ~ 127.15.63
16KB
Y
Y
Internal
%M XX or %M XX.X
%MW0 ~ 131,072
256KB
Y
Y
File Register
%R XX or %R XX.X %W XX or %W XX.X
%RW0 ~ 32767 (Block 0) %RW0 ~ 32767 (Block 1) %WW0 ~ 65535 (Block 0+1)
128KB (2*64KB)
Y
Y
Character (%A)
Bool/SINT/USINT/INT/DINT LINT….
512KB
N
N
N
Y
Local Global
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Memory Types, their Addressing and Retention
12
6
2/2/2012
• I/O Memory Structure and Expression %IXX.X.X
Contact number (0 ~ 63, variable according to a unit) Slot number (0 ~ 11) Base number (1 ~31) Unit (X:Bit, B:Byte, W:Word, D:Double Word, L:Long Word) Input / Output (%I: IN, %Q: OUT) %IX0.0.16
%IB0.0.1
%IB0.0.0
CPU
%IX0.0.48 IN 64 Slot 0
%QX0.1.0 %IX0.2.0 OUT 64 Slot 1
IN 64 Slot 2
Slot 3 ~ 11
%IW0.0.0 %IX0.0.15
%IX0.0.0
%IB0.0.3
%IB0.0.2
%IW0.0.1 %IX0.0.31
%IX0.0.16
%IB0.0.5
%IB0.0.4
%IW0.0.2 %IX0.0.47
%IX0.0.32
%IB0.0.7
%IB0.0.6
%IX0.0.0 %IX0.0.1 %IX0.0.2 %IX0.0.3 %IX0.0.4 %IX0.0.5 %IX0.0.6 %IX0.0.7 %IX0.0.8 %IX0.0.9 %IX0.0.10 %IX0.0.11 %IX0.0.12 %IX0.0.13 %IX0.0.14 %IX0.0.15
%IW0.0.3 %IX0.0.63
%IX0.0.31
%IX0.0.48
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
%IX0.0.63
%QX0.1.63
%IX0.2.63
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Memory Types, their Addressing and Retention
2/2/2012
13
Honeywell
Direct Variable – Internal Memory • Internal memory structure and expression %MXX.X Bit Number (In case of bit expression) Address (variable according to a unit) Unit (X:Bit, B:Byte, W:Word, D:Double Word, L:Long Word) Word %MB1
%MB0
%MW0
%MW0
%MW1 %MX15 (%MW0.15) %MB3
%MX1 (%MW0.1)
%MX0 (%MW0.0)
%MB2
%MW2 %MW3 %MW4
%MW1
%MW5 %MX31 (%MW1.15) %MB5
%MX17 (%MW1.1) %MX16 (%MW1.0) %MB4
%MW6
128Kword
%MW7 %MW8
%MW2 %MX47 (%MW2.15) %MB7
%MX33 (%MW2.1) %MX32 (%MW2.0)
%MW9 %MW10
%MB6
%MW3 %MX63 (%MW3.15)
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
%MX49 (%MW3.1) %MX48 (%MW3.0)
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Memory Types, their Addressing and Retention
14
7
2/2/2012
2
Honeywell
Direct Variable – IO Memory
Honeywell
Symbolic Variable & Memory Allocation Automatic allocation
Auto_run Automatic address allocation
512 KB
User Defined Allocation
Symbolic Area (%A)
Water_Level
Valve_open %IW0.0.7
%IX0.0.4
%IX0.0.0
User Defined Allocation
%QX0.0.0
%MX7
%MX1 %MX0
%MB3 16 KB
16 KB Direct Variable Area (%I)
256 KB Direct Variable Area (%Q)
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Direct Variable Area (%M)
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Memory Types, their Addressing and Retention
15
2/2/2012
Honeywell
This page intentionally left blank
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Memory Types, their Addressing and Retention
16
8
2/2/2012
2
Describe the ML200R Controller Redundancy
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
17
Describe the ML200R Controller Redundancy 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Introduction • The ML200R provides a Redundant System for – CPU – Power – IO Cable (Ring Topology with dual paths)
• Redundancy established through a dedicated high speed 1Gigabit Fiber-optic Link – Control switches from Master CPU to backup CPU within 22 msec and without any bump – Redundancy Synchronization comprises of the data and program memory areas
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
18
9
Describe the ML200R Controller Redundancy 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Redundancy – Features
Delay Time for Redundant Operation • System Data, like System Flag and Communication Flag, are synchronized between Redundant CPU’s every 2.8ms • Redundancy Parameter Synchronization – I/Q base: in 1ms for 32 bases of IO – M area (Internal memory): in 250 µs for size of 2KB word – R (Retain) area: in 1.5ms for 2KB word – PID area (K): in 0.5ms/PID Block – Automatic Allocated Variable: for 32 KB, 2.5 ms added
Task
Sync cable between CPUs and the Ring-type I/O Network
Data Back-up
1Gbps Fiber Optic
Data Synchronization
Redundancy parameter configuration
Parameter
Value
Switchover Time
4 to 22 ms
Delay Time for Redundant operation
Proportional to data which master transmits to backup Maximum 15 ms
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
19
Redundancy Status LEDs
Defines network that will be used for I/O Connection F: Fiber Optic T: Twisted pair CAT5
–
•
•
Comprises of four LEDs; RED, MASTER, CPU-A, CPU-B – RED ON or OFF indicates Redundant or Single operation of the CPU – MASTER ON or OFF indicates the current master or backup CPU – CPU-A and CPU-B are the CPU classification LEDs Redundancy RUN/STOP LED LED (RED) – Operational Status of CPU – Green – Operational and RUN mode – Red – Operational and STOP mode
Redundancy Status LEDs RUN / STOP LED Warning LED Error LED
Redundancy Sync Connector –
•
Describe the ML200R Controller Redundancy 2/2/2012
Honeywell
CPU Part Names and Functions •
Requirements for Task
Operation Monitoring
Interface connector between CPUs for monitoring and data sharing
CPU Redundancy Designation Switch
CPU Redundancy designation switch – –
CPU classifier In a redundant controller pair, one CPU must be set to ‘A’ while the other must set to ‘B’
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Redundancy Sync Connector
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
20
10
Describe the ML200R Controller Redundancy 2/2/2012
ML200R CPU Base
ML200R I/O Base
• In ML200R, a new 2-slot CPU Base is introduced along with the existing 6-slot CPU Base – In the 2-slot CPU Base, two FEnet Modules (Instead of six) can be connected
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
21
Honeywell
Redundancy Hardware - Power Supply •
Power LED: DC5V power display
•
RUN Terminal: Relay contact that changes as per State of CPU.
Power LED RUN Terminal FG Terminal
– Closed when CPU is in RUN. – Open when CPU is in STOP error or STOP mode.
•
FG Terminal: Frame Grounding
•
LG Terminal: Line grounding terminal
LG Terminal Power Input Terminal
Terminal Cover
•
Power Input Terminal: AC110V or AC220V connection
•
Terminal cover: Unit Protection Cover
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Describe the ML200R Controller Redundancy 2/2/2012
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
22
11
Describe the ML200R Controller Redundancy 2/2/2012
2
Honeywell
Redundancy Hardware - CPU and I/O Base
Honeywell
Redundancy Operation - Procedure Standby
Master Program Execution
Data Sync. by FB
Comm. Service & Inner Process
Running
P L C
Output Refresh Module Check
L O O P
Module Check
Comm. Service & Inner Process
Data Sync. in Redundant Operation
Input Refresh
Data Synchronization
Data Synchronization Master Switchover Management & Scan Sync.
Scan Sync. regardless of Operation Mode
Master Switchover Management & Scan Sync.
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
23
Describe the ML200R Controller Redundancy 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Redundancy Operation – Mode Changes
• This table describes the resultant state of System (Master and Standby) when an Operation Mode change is implemented by Key or SoftMaster System Status before Mode change
Single Operation (Master: Run, Standby: STOP)
Redundant Operation (Master: Run, Standby: Run) Operation in STOP mode (Master: STOP, Standby: STOP)
Mode Change Master
Standby
RUN to STOP
No change: STOP
No change: RUN
STOP to RUN
RUN to STOP
No change: RUN
No change: RUN
RUN to STOP
STOP to RUN
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
System Status after mode change When Master is stopped, System is in stopped. When Standby is changed to run, System is in Redundant Operation Mode. When Master is stopped, Standby CPU takes over System Control to become Master; System is in Single Operation Mode. When Standby is stopped, System is in Single Operation Mode. Master is in control of system.
The first-Run-mode-change CPU (A or No Change : STOP B) takes the control to become Master; System is in Single Operation Mode. Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
24
12
Describe the ML200R Controller Redundancy 2/2/2012
Pre-Conditions in Redundant Mode for successful Switchover Operation • Master and Stand by CPU in RUN Mode • CPU Sync. Cable (Fiber Optic Link) is connected between Master and Standby CPU
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
25
Describe the ML200R Controller Redundancy 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Redundancy Mode Switchover • Conditions for Automatic Switchover – – – – – –
Failure of both power supplies of Master CPU Master CPU in Stop Mode due to faulty operation FEnet module in Master Base is detached Fault in CPU Module (CPU Module is detached) I/O Module in Extension Base is detached System Error in Master CPU (Watchdog Error)
• Conditions for Manual Switchover – Key Switch on Master CPU is set to STOP – CPU Mode is changed to STOP Mode from Softmaster by using: • Master Switchover Command • MST_CHG Instruction
• Conditions in which Switchover DOES NOT Take Place – Failure of one of the redundant power supplies – Standby CPU is not in RUN Mode when Master CPU Stops – Mask Flag on interface module or I/O module is set for Error MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
26
13
Describe the ML200R Controller Redundancy 2/2/2012
2
Honeywell
Pre-Conditions in Redundant Mode for Switchover
Honeywell
Restart Mode in PLC
• Restart Mode decides the method of initialization of the variables and system at the time of Startup of the PLC Operation • At the time of Startup of the Standby PLC, it executes initialization of the variables according to the Restart Mode programmed for it. But after that, it receives the data and program backup from the master PLC • Restart Mode Types – Cold Restart and Warm Restart
• Initialization of the variables depend on the following: – Variables configured with Default Settings – Variables defined in Retain Area of Memory – Variables whose initial value is programmed in the initialization task of PLC
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
27
Variable Initialization During PLC Restart
Describe the ML200R Controller Redundancy 2/2/2012
Honeywell
• The following table gives details of the Variable Initialization in Cold and Warm Restart of the PLC. Mode
COLD Restart
Setting
WARM Restart
Default or no Settings configured
All variables are initialized to zero
All variables are initialized to zero
Retain area settings done
All variables are initialized to zero
Previous process value retained
Initialization task programmed
User-defined value as programmed in initialization task
User-defined value as programmed in initialization task
Retain and Initialization
User-defined value as programmed in initialization task
Previous process value Retained
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
28
14
Describe the ML200R Controller Redundancy 2/2/2012
• Data Retain Area in Operation Retain (Data %M area M emory) (Retain) Holding previous Holding previous Reset Value value All variables are All variables are Over all reset initialized to zero initialized to zero DCLR All variables are All variables are (toggled for < initialized to zero initialized to zero 3sec) DCLR (more All variables are All variables are than 3 sec) initialized to zero initialized to zero Holding previous Holding previous STOPRUN value value Item
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
29
%R area Holding previous value Holding previous value Holding previous value All variables are initialized to zero Holding previous value
Describe the ML200R Controller Redundancy 2/2/2012
Honeywell
This page intentionally left blank
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
30
15
Describe the ML200R Controller Redundancy 2/2/2012
2
Honeywell
Redundancy Operation - Data Retention
Describe the ML200R I/O Modules
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
31
Describe the ML200R I/O Modules 2/2/2012
Honeywell
ML200R - Digital Input Modules • • • • •
•
Available in 8, 16, 32 and 64 Channels 110V AC DI Cards (16 Channels) available 220V AC DI Cards (8 Channels) available LED for Channel Status Indication 24V DC Input Modules (8,16,32 and 64 Channels) in sink/source or only source type available Photocoupler Isolation
For 64 Channel I/O Module Switch selects which LEDs indicated
– Used for field to circuit isolation
•
Easy maintenance – Terminal Block Type
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
32
16
Describe the ML200R I/O Modules 2/2/2012
• Double click on IO Parameter Option • Double click the on already added module to view the Configuration Options available for the Digital Input Module – Input Module Settings: User is able to configure the Filter Constant Value for the Input Signal in this Parameter Window. Filter Constant Value Configuration Options
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
33
Honeywell
ML200R - Digital Output Modules • • • • • •
Describe the ML200R I/O Modules 2/2/2012
Available in 8, 16, 32 and 64 Channels Relay, Traic and Transistor Modules (sink or source type) LED for Channel Status Indication Photocoupler Isolation Easy Maintenance – Terminal Block Type Thermal Protection
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
34
17
Describe the ML200R I/O Modules 2/2/2012
2
Honeywell
DI Module Configuration Option
Honeywell
DO Module Configuration Options
• Emergency Output Setting: Used to set the output signal behavior in case of a failure – Hold: Output signal Holds the current output value – Clear: Output signal is Cleared
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
35
Describe the ML200R I/O Modules 2/2/2012
Honeywell
ML200R System •
The ML200R System has a Dedicated I/O Network which connects through the Expansion Driver Module
•
The I/O Network is set on a Ring Topology
CPU Redundancy Cable
– On Single Network failure, Bus Topology applies for I/O Network Communication
•
Any Module Type (DI, AI etc.) can be assigned to any Base or Slot except Base 0 – Base 0 allows only Communication Modules such as FEnet
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Dedicated IO Network
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
36
18
Describe the ML200R I/O Modules 2/2/2012
Honeywell
• ML200R System now has dual I/O link redundancy – Expansion Driver Modules having Redundancy are introduced – Expansion Base supporting Redundant Expansion Driver Modules is introduced
Slots for Redundant Expansion Driver Modules
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
37
ML200R System with Redundant I/O Link
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
38
19
Describe the ML200R I/O Modules 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Describe the ML200R I/O Modules 2/2/2012
2
ML200R System with Redundant I/O Link
Describe the ML200R Special Modules
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
39
Describe the ML200R Special Modules 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Introduction • Special Module Types: – – – – –
Analog Input Analog Output Temperature Measuring SOE Module High Speed Counter
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
40
20
Describe the ML200R Special Modules 2/2/2012
•
Key Features of 2MLF-AV8A
– Voltage Module and Current Module – High Speed A/D Conversion & Processing • 250µs / Channel – High Resolution • 16 Bit – Easy Configuration via SoftMaster – LED Status Displays for RUN/ERROR conditions – Channel can be individually Enabled/ Disabled – Input Signal Disconnection Status is available for each Channel
• Part Number Identification
2MLF-AV8A F = Analog I/O
•
8 Channels Voltage and Current Modules (2MLF-AV8A, 2MLF-AC8A)
A = A/D : AI Module D = D/A : AO Module
•
4 Channels Isolated AI card (Voltage and Current 2MLF-AD4S)
V = Voltage Module C = Current Module No. Of Channels
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
41
Describe the ML200R Special Modules 2/2/2012
Analog I/O Modules Module Type
Honeywell Part Number
Description
2MLF-AV8A
Voltage Input: 8 Channels DC 1~5V/0~5V/0~10V/-10~10V
2MLF-AC8A
Current Input: 8 Channels DC 0~20mA/4~20mA
2MLF-AD8A
Voltage/Current Input: 8 Channels
2MLF-AD4S
Voltage/Current Input: 4 Channels Isolation Between Channels
2MLF-AD16A
Voltage or current input, 16 channels
2MLF-DV4A
Voltage Output: 4 Channels DC 1~5V/0~5V/0~10V/-10~10V
2MLF-DC4A
Current Output: 4 Channels DC 0~20mA/4~20mA
2MLF-DC4S
Current Output: 4 Channels Isolation Between Channels
2MLF-DV8A
Voltage Output: 8 Channels DC 1~5V/0~5V/0~10V/-10~10V
2MLF-DC8A
Current Output: 8 Channels DC 0~20mA/4~20mA
Analog Input
Analog Output
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
42
21
Describe the ML200R Special Modules 2/2/2012
2
Honeywell
Analog Input Modules
Analog Input Modules
Honeywell Designation
2MLF-AC8A RUN
C H O C H O C H O C H O C H O C H O C H O C H O
1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A
1
RUN LED
Details Displays the operation status of 2MLF-AV8A or 2MLF-AC8A On: Normal Operation Flickering: Error occurs Off: DC 5V disconnected, 2MLFAV8A /2MLF-AC8A module error
2
2
TR BLOCK
B C
Analog input terminal, whose respective channels can be connected with external devices.
D E F
4-20mA 0-20mA
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
43
Analog Input Module Configuration Options
Describe the ML200R Special Modules 2/2/2012
Honeywell
• Filtering Process option is used to remove the noise present in the input signal
Used to Enable/Disable the channel and configure the I/P and Output Ranges Enter the Filter Constant Value (1-99) if the Filter Process is Enabled Select to apply the same settings to all channels in module Enable Hold Last Value feature for the Analog Input Channel MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
44
22
Describe the ML200R Special Modules 2/2/2012
Honeywell
• Averaging Function is mainly used in the A/D conversion of Abnormal Analog Input Signal – e.g. Analog Input signal with high noise or surge – Executes the A/D conversion for channel with specified frequency or time interval
• Average of all accumulated values is transferred to the Analog Input Channel
• Count-Avr: 2 – 64000 times • Time-Avr: 4 – 16000 msecs MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
45
Honeywell
ML200R - Analog Output Modules • • • • • •
Describe the ML200R Special Modules 2/2/2012
High Speed D/A Conversion and Processing 14 Bit High Resolution 8 Channels Voltage and Current Modules 4 channels isolated AO card (Voltage and Current) LED for Module RUN Status Indication Each Channel can be Individually Disabled/Enabled
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
46
23
Describe the ML200R Special Modules 2/2/2012
2
Averaging Functions in Analog Input Module
Honeywell
Analog Output Module Configuration Options
Used to Enable/Disable the channel and configure the I/P and Output Ranges
Select Channel Output Type in case of Channel or Communication Failure
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Describe the ML200R Special Modules 2/2/2012
47
Honeywell
Analog Input/Output Modules • Analog Voltage Module Analog Input Digital Output
1~5V
0~5V
0 ~ 10 V
Analog Input Range
-10 ~ 10 V
Resolution (1/16000)
Unsigned Value
0 ~ 16000
1~5V
0.250 mV
Signed Value
-8000 ~ 8000
0~5V
0.3125 mV
0 ~ 10 V
0.625 mV
-10 ~ 10 V
1.250 mV
Precise Value
1000 ~ 5000
0 ~ 5000
Percentile Value
0 ~ 10000
-10000 ~ 10000
0 ~ 10000
• Analog Current Module Analog Input Digital Output
4 ~ 20 ㎃
0 ~ 20 ㎃
Unsigned Value
0 ~ 16000
Signed Value
-8000 ~ 8000
Precise Value
4000 ~ 20000
Percentile Value
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
0 ~ 20000
Analog input range
Resolution (1/16000)
4 ~ 20
1.0 µA
0 ~ 20
1.25 µA
0 ~ 10000
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
48
24
Describe the ML200R Special Modules 2/2/2012
• Key Features
2MLF-RD4A RUN ALM
C H O
C H O
– Number of channels available: 4
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A
A C B H b O
C H O
– RTD Module is identified as 2MLF RD4A
A B b
A B b
A B b
– Two types of RTD Sensors supported: – PT 100 – J PT 100 – Functionality to sense disconnection of the sensor per channel is available
B C
– Temperature representation to first decimal place is available
D E FG
– Can sense temperatures from -200 deg C to 850 deg C
F
PT100 JPT100 4A
– Accuracy within ±0.2%
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
49
Describe the ML200R Special Modules 2/2/2012
Honeywell
RTD Module Designation
2MLF-RD4A RUN ALM
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A
A C B H b O
C H O
C H O
C H O
1
A B b
A B b
A B b
1
Details
RUN LED
Displays the H/W Operation Status ( Fatal Error) ON: Normal State FLICKERING: Error State (0.2s) OFF: DC 5V Disconnected H/W Error
2
2
ALM LED
Displays The Status of the Channel (Non Fatal Error) ON: Normal State FLICKERING: Disconnect Sensed (1 s)
B C
OFF: Operation Stops for all Channel
D E FG
F
PT100 JPT100
3
3
TR BLOCK
3-Wire RTD Sensor can be connected
4A
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
50
25
Describe the ML200R Special Modules 2/2/2012
2
Honeywell
RTD Module
Honeywell
RTD Module Configuration Option • RTD Module Configuration Options Used to Enable/Disable the channel and configure sensor type and Engineering Units
Specify the filter constant value
Select the required Scaling type. Options available are Bipolar and Unipolar
Specify the min. and max. Scaling values and Process alarm Limit values
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
51
Describe the ML200R Special Modules 2/2/2012
Honeywell
RTD Module Configuration Option • RTD Module Configuration Options
Specify the Average processing value according to selected Average processing method
Specify the high and low limit values for RCA
Select the RCA type
Specify the RCA time interval
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
52
26
Describe the ML200R Special Modules 2/2/2012
Honeywell
• Sampling: This method is selected by default and the averaging function is disabled if this method is selected • Time-Avr and Count-Avr: These functions are already explained in the Analog Input module slide • Moving Average: In this mode, all temperature converted values on a specific channel for specific number of times, are added and the average is produced on the channel as digital data – Samples are taken for every 40 msecs and its output is passed to the channel in every scan
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Describe the ML200R Special Modules 2/2/2012
53
Honeywell
Thermocouple Module • Key Features
Input sensor Type
Temperature Input Range
K
-250~13500 deg C
– 9 types of sensors available: K/J/E/T/B/R/S/N/C
J
-250~12000 deg C
E
-250~10000 deg C
– Functionality to sense disconnection between the thermocouple
T
-250~4000 deg C
B
400~13500C
R
-50~17500C
– Thermocouple Module is identified as 2MLF-TC4S – Number of Channels available: 4
– Temperature sensor, compensating cable, and modules are available – Temperature is displayed in Fahrenheit or Celsius
S
-50~17500C
N
-270~13000C
C
0~23000C
– Temperature representation to the first decimal place is available – Accuracy within ±0.1% at 25 ºC
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
54
27
Describe the ML200R Special Modules 2/2/2012
2
Average Processing Functions in RTD Module
Honeywell
DISOE Module • DISOE Module detects and records the events from the field devices with 1ms resolution • Logged events will be permanently stored in the module – Maximum of 300 events are supported per module
• Event logs from individual SOE modules are stored in the CPU memory (max. 3000 events) – These logs can be periodically transferred to the Experion Server – Maximum of 3000 events are supported per CPU
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
55
Describe the ML200R Special Modules 2/2/2012
Honeywell
DISOE Module Configuration Options • Input Filter Time: Time interval used to identify the event
– Defines the time until which the input must remain in the new state to consider it as an event
• Recommended Input Filter time settings: – Input Filter No. of events configured in Event (No.) parameter
All the events discarded
No. of events generated within specified Chattering time interval Compared Value
• Count Value ≤ Compared Value1, Count Value ≥ Compared Value2 • Count Value ≤ Compared Value1, Count Value ≥ Compared Value2
• Once the condition is set to obtain the output signal on the counter channel; the following signals are needed to be ON: – Compared Enabled signal, and – Output Enabled Signal MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
64
32
Describe the ML200R Special Modules 2/2/2012
• This slide explains the “Present Value < Compared Value” condition • If the present value is less than the compared value, then the output signal is provided to the output of the High Speed Counter module
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
65
Describe the ML200R Special Modules 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Counter Mode •
Linear Count Mode – When the Upper/Lower count limit is reached in this mode, the Carry/Borrow flag is set and the count operation is Stopped in this mode
•
Counting Mode
0H address for CH0 and 19H for CH1 (Internal Memory)
Linear Count
Set to “0”
Ring Count
Set to “1”
Ring Count Mode – When the Upper/Lower count limit is reached in this mode, the Carry/Borrow flag is set but the count operation is Restarted again
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
66
33
Describe the ML200R Special Modules 2/2/2012
2
Honeywell
Present Value < Compared Value
Honeywell
Auxiliary Mode
• High Speed counter module provides the following 6 Auxiliary modes • To use the Auxiliary Modes, the Auxiliary Mode Enabled Signal must be ON. – Count Clear: Used to clear present count – Count Latch: Used to latch the present count – Sampling Count: Used to count from 0 for the specified time – Input Frequency Measure: Used to measure the frequency of the input signal – Revolution/ Unit Time: Used to count the number of pulses – Count Disable: Stop the count operation
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
67
Describe the ML200R Special Modules 2/2/2012
Honeywell
This page intentionally left blank
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
68
34
Describe the ML200R Special Modules 2/2/2012
2
Describe the ML200R Interface Modules
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
69
Describe the ML200R Interface Modules 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Introduction •
MasterLogic 200R series supports the following open networks through the individual communication modules – High-speed Ethernet or FEnet modules for the communication with Experion PKS or other HMI systems • Available on TP-CAT5 or multi-mode fiber-optic media • FEnet also supports Peer-to-Peer communication – Serial Communication or Snet Module for communication between the PLC and the serial devices – Profibus-DP master module or Pnet for communication with Profibus-DP • Includes communication with Smart I/O modules – Profibus Slave Interface module is used for ML I/O’s with other Profibus master controllers like PMD, C300 – DeviceNet master module or Dnet for communication with DeviceNet devices • Includes communication with Smart I/O modules
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
70
35
Describe the ML200R Interface Modules 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Fast Ethernet / FEnet • Key Features of FEnet – Supports TCP/IP and UDP/IP protocols – High Reliability and performance with a 32 bit processor – Fiber Optic Module is available – With the help of SoftMaster-NM, it communicates with third party products – Provides E-mail service – Operates on a maximum speed of 100Mbps – Provides ONEIP Solution
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
71
Describe the ML200R Interface Modules 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Serial Communication / Snet • Key features: – 3 types of modules are available: • RS-232C with 2 Ports • RS-422 (485) with 2 Ports • RS-232C 1Port / RS-422 1Port – Connects to 32 devices using an RS 485/422 connection – Used for MODBUS communication • It can act as both Master and Slave – Maximum distance is 500 meters using RS422 protocol – Extensive and detailed Diagnostics using SoftMaster-NM
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
72
36
Describe the ML200R Interface Modules 2/2/2012
• Profibus - DP – Low Cost network appropriate for field level – Fast Slave communication – Maximum distance of the network is 1200 meters – Convenient parameter setting through Sycon and the HS link parameter – Can be used for communication with third party PLCs – Maximum communication speed is 12 Mbps
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
73
Describe the ML200R Interface Modules 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Profibus-DP Using Pnet SoftMaster PLC Engineering and SYCON Configuration tool
MasterLogic PLC
Serial / USB
CNC
SMART IO
SMART IO Sensor
Repeater SMART IO
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
SMART IO
SMART IO
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
74
37
ET200M
Describe the ML200R Interface Modules 2/2/2012
2
Honeywell
Profibus-DP / Pnet
Honeywell
Profibus Remote Interface Module • Used to interface MasterLogic I/O’s with other controllers such as C300, and PMD which can be used as Profibus-DP master devices • Acts as a Profibus-DP Slave sending I/O details and diagnostic information to the Profibus master devices • Installed in the CPU slot of the ML200 chassis • Can be configured using a separate tool named Extended Adapter – Present in Start All Programs SoftMaster
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
75
Describe the ML200R Interface Modules 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Profibus Remote Interface Module • I/O modules supported with Profibus Remote Interface module
– Example: For temperature measurement 2MLF-TC4S and 2MLF-RD4A module types can be used – Detailed list of supported module types is available in Pnet Remote I/F Module (2MLL-PSRA) User Guide Profibus Remote Interface Module MasterLogic I/O modules
PMD Controller ML200 Controller Chassis
ML200 Controller Chassis MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
76
38
Describe the ML200R Interface Modules 2/2/2012
• Used to interface MasterLogic I/O’s with other controllers such as C300, and PMD which can be used as Profibus-DP Master Devices • Acts as a Profibus-DP Slave sending I/O details and diagnostic information to the Profibus Master Devices • Installed in the I/O Slot of the ML200 or ML200R I/O Chassis • Can be configured using SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Describe the ML200R Interface Modules 2/2/2012
77
Honeywell
Profibus Slave Interface Module – Architecture • With ML200R and Profibus Master (2MLL-PMEA) ML200R
Power
FEnet Interface Modules
ML200R Controller Chassis
Expansion Base1 Profibus Master (2MLL-PMEA)
Expansion Drive Module(2MLR-DBST)
Power
Other Interface Modules
Expansion Base2 Backplane Bus
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Profibus Slave (2MLL-PSEA)
Power
Expansion Drive Module(2MLR-DBST)
Profibus-DP Communication
I/O Modules
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
78
39
Describe the ML200R Interface Modules 2/2/2012
2
Honeywell
Profibus Slave Interface Module (2MLL-PSEA)
Honeywell
Profibus Slave Interface Module – Architecture • With third party Profibus Master
Profibus Slave Interface Module MasterLogic I/O Modules
PMD Controller ML200/ML200R I/O Chassis
ML200/ML200R I/O Chassis
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
79
Describe the ML200R Interface Modules 2/2/2012
Honeywell
DeviceNet / Dnet • DeviceNet – Open communication with all DeviceNet devices like actuators, sensors, drives, etc. – Flexible communication speed setting • 125, 250, 500 Kbps – Flexibility in network configuration • Supports Multi-drop and T-branch connection – Maximum communication distance is 500m – Easy configuration through SyCon software and the HS link parameter – Can perform diagnostics and status monitoring of slave modules in the network using Autoscan
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
80
40
Describe the ML200R Interface Modules 2/2/2012
Honeywell Fast Ethernet
Snet
PROFIBUS
DeviceNet
Speed
100/10Mbps
300~11.5kbp s
9.6k ~12Mbps
125k/250k/500kbps
Physical Layer
IEEE802.3U – 100baseTx, 100baseFx
RS232C \ RS422 \ RS485
RS485
CAN
Distance
100m (Node UTP/STP) 2Km (Node Fiber optic)
Max 500m (RS422 / 485)
Max 1.2Km
100/250/500
Station Service
64
32
126 (32/segment)
64 (1 master + 63 slave)
HSL
Yes
NA
Yes
Yes
MLDP
Yes
Yes
NA
NA
Common Protocol
Yes (Modbus)
Yes (Modbus)
NA
NA
P2P
Yes
Yes
NA
NA
SoftMaster-200 I/F
Yes
Yes
NA
NA
E-Mail
Yes
NA
NA
NA
Configuration Software
SoftMaster-NM
Max. No. of Network Modules
Max. 12 units (High Speed Link Service: 8 units, PTP Service :8 Units)
Diagnostics
Auto Scan, Ping test, Frame Monitor, Link Monitor, Loop back
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
SoftMaster-NM, Sycon
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
81
Precautions
Describe the ML200R Interface Modules 2/2/2012
Honeywell
• Precautions for System Configuration: – HS Link Station Number should be unique for every module • Station number of Pnet interface module must be set by the “SyCon Configuration Tool” – For an FEnet module, the IP addresses must be unique for all modules in the network – Use cable that complies with the specifications in the data sheet – If the remote communication cable is connected, keep the cable far away from the Power line or inductive noise – Improper cable connections (snarled cable, redundant connections) may cause communication errors – While the power of the module is ON, mounting and dismounting of the module will cause system errors and the CPU module will halt
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
82
41
Describe the ML200R Interface Modules 2/2/2012
2
Comparison
This page was intentionally left blank.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2
Topic: MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation Contents Identify the ML200R System Components ............................................................................................3 Verify the ML200R System Connections ...............................................................................................5
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
1
This page was intentionally left blank.
2
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation Identify the ML200R System Components
Identify the ML200R System Components 2
Practice Objective In this LAB, you will identify the various parts of the ML200R system using a check-off list.
Prerequisites •
ML200R Hardware with I/O
Introduction You will be provided with a checklist which has a list of hardware components used for an ML200R cabinet. You need to identify the various parts using the checklist. TIP Quantities are also important.
Show your instructor your completed checklist, including discrepancies, if any.
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
3
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation Identify the ML200R System Components
ML200R EXPERION INTG CPU Rack and IO Parts Check off List QTY per cabinet
4
MODEL NO.
Part Number
DESCRIPTION
4
2MLR-AC22
Power Supply for redundant power, 220 VAC, 5.5 Amp
2
2MLR-CPUH/T
CPU Modules
2
2MLL-EFMT
FENet, Ethernet Communication Modules
14
2MLT-DMMA
Dummy Module
2
2MLR-AC23
Power Supply for redundant power, 220 VAC, 8.5 Amp
1
2MLL-DBSF
Network Slave Module
1
2MLF-AC8A
Analog Input Module, 8 CH (Current Type)
1
2MLF-DC4A
DA Conversion Module, AO, 4 Ch
1
2MLQ-TR4B
DO Transistor Output, 32 points
1
2MLI-D24A
DI DC 24V Input, 32 points
2
2MLR-M06P
Base for Module Installation, 6 slot
1
2MLR-E12P
Base for Module Installation, 12 slot
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
Present?
2/2/2012
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation Verify the ML200R System Connections
Verify the ML200R System Connections 2
Objective The objective of this LAB is to familiarize the student with the hardware components of the ML200R Demo Kit. Prerequisites •
ML200R Demo Kit
Introduction In this lab you will perform the following: •
2/2/2012
Observe and Identify the Hardware components of the ML 200 Demo Kit.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
5
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation Verify the ML200R System Connections
Process: Please check off each item as you complete the task. Your course instructor may wish to observe you while you perform these tasks. LEARN BY DOING
Step
Action
1
Go to ML200R DEMO KIT, and perform the following steps.
2
Locate the Remote IO Extension Drive Module in the Kit.
3
Is the TX/RX LED in the IO Extension Drive Module blinking ____?
4
How many cables are connected in the two ports of the IO Extension Drive Module______?
5
What is the number set on the station number switch_____?
6
Locate the ML200R CPU A Controller Module.
7
Locate the Operation mode switch on the ML200R PLC.
8
Is the SYNC cable connected on the ML200R CPU _________?
9
The IO cable on PORT1 is connected to ________ module, and PORT2 is connected to ________ module.
10
Where is the Reset/D clear switch on the ML200R CPU___?
11
Locate the CPU A and CPU B status LEDs on the ML200R CPU A.
12
Is the ERR LED of ML200R CPU A module ON or OFF ____?
13
If the ERR LED is ON, list the possible reasons. ________________________________ ________________________________ ________________________________ ________________________________ ________________________________
6
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation Verify the ML200R System Connections LEARN BY DOING
2/2/2012
Step
Action
14
Identify the Power supply module for the ML200R CPU A.
15
What is the Slot number an Analog Input module ____?
16
What is the Slot number for a Digital Input module____?
17
What is the Slot number for a Digital Output module____?
18
What is the Slot number for an Analog Output module____?
19
What is the Slot number for a Pulse Input module____?
20
What is the Slot number for a RTD module____?
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2
7
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation Verify the ML200R System Connections
This page was intentionally left blank.
8
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
3
Describe SoftMaster Features and Installation
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
1
Describe SoftMaster Features and Installation 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Introduction • SoftMaster is a tool designed to program and debug the MasterLogic200R PLC series • Key Features of SoftMaster :– Multi-PLC, Multi-Program • Number of PLCs or Programs can be used in SoftMaster – Drag and Drop option – Shortcut keys – Message Windows – Convenient Variable / Comment Editing – Convenient Program Edit – Monitoring Functions – Custom Events – Module Changing Wizard • Able to change Modules while plant is running
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
2
1
Describe SoftMaster Features and Installation 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Installation – Step 1
• Double click on the SoftMaster 3.62 exe file from the CD to start the installation • Click on the Allow option in the displayed User Account Control (UAC) window.
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
3
Describe SoftMaster Features and Installation 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Installation – Step 2 • Click on the Install button in the displayed window
• Click on the Yes button
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4
2
Describe SoftMaster Features and Installation 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Installation – Step 3
3
Enter the User Name and Company Name
Click on the Next button to continue
Click on the Next button to continue
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
MasterLogic Software Introduction
5
Describe SoftMaster Features and Installation 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Installation – Step 4 Installation path of the Software is displayed here
Click the Change… button to change the Software Installation path
Click on the Next button to continue the installation
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Click on the Install button to Install the Softmaster 3.62 release software
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
6
3
Describe SoftMaster Features and Installation 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Installation – Step 5
• Select Install this driver anyway if windows security message is displayed.
• Click on at the Finish button
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
7
Describe SoftMaster Features and Installation 4/25/2012
Honeywell
This page intentionally left blank
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
8
4
Describe SoftMaster Features and Installation 4/25/2012
3
Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
9
Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Introduction • SoftMaster Window consists of – – – – – –
Menu bar and Toolbar Project Window Function Window Variable Monitoring Window Message window Program editor
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
10
5
Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software 4/25/2012
Honeywell
SoftMaster
Menu bar and Toolbar Groups
Project Window
Main Program Editor Window
Function Window
Variable Monitoring Windows
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Message Window Tabs
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
11
Honeywell
New Project
Used to enter the project name. The extension of project file is “.xgp”
Open a New Project
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software 4/25/2012
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
12
6
Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Configuration of Project
3
Browse to select a folder to store the project file
A folder identical to the project name is created and the project file is stored in this folder
Select the PLC type Select the type of CPU
Enter the Name of the Program included in a project
Select the programming language LD: Ladder Diagram SFC: Sequential Function chart ST: Structured Text
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Enter Project description
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
13
Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Project
Uploads the Project and program stored in the PLC Imports or Exports the File from the storage location in the Below Formats
Compares two projects stored on the PC and displays its result Item
plc
Global Variables/Address
gdv
Program
prg
I/O Parameter
iop
Basic Parameter
bsp
Function/FB
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
14
7
File Extension
PLC
Fun, src
Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Edit Menu
Optimizes the Program automatically
Inputs a comment or label in the cursor position
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Sets or removes Block Mask to or from cursorpositioned rung or specified block area in rung unit
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
15
Honeywell
Find/ Replace
Finds the desired Address or Text based on the type
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software 4/25/2012
Replaces the desired Address or Text with the new Device or Text
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
16
8
Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software 4/25/2012
Honeywell
View for Ladder Diagram Language Converts to IL View during the LD Edit
Shows or hides the Project, Message, Variable Monitoring, or the Instruction Window
3
Displays the used-memory information on the message window’s cross reference tab
Displays the used Address information on the message window’s Used Address tab
Inspects the program for the Logical, Grammar, and Duplicate coil error and it displays the result on the respective message window’s program tab
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
17
Honeywell
View for Ladder Diagram Language
Displays variables / Addresses or the combination as selected
Open Local Variables: Opens the list of local variables
LD Properties option selects variables / addresses or the combination as selected
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software 4/25/2012
Open User Function: Opens the Program window Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
18
9
Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software 4/25/2012
Honeywell
View for SFC
Opens the Block/Action/Transition List
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
19
Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Online Menu Changes PLC Mode
Connects to PLC
Swaps between Master and Standby CPU
Specifies the connection type and parameters
Reset PLC: Reboots PLC Clear PLC: Clears Latch Area 1,2
PLC System Logs
Online Modification
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
20
10
Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Monitor Menu
3
Start Monitoring: starts to monitor Pause: Temporarily stops the monitor Resume: starts from hold point Pausing Conditions: Specifies conditions for the monitor temporary stop
Specifies the device value being monitored
Executes System, Address, special Module (A I/O, HSC), Trend and PID monitoring and SOE Monitoring
Custom Events: Time stamps and logs Events Data Traces: stores the waveforms in CPU as configured
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
21
Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software 4/25/2012
Honeywell
SOE Monitoring
• SOE Monitoring software is used mainly to monitor the events recorded by SOE modules and also are useful to save them to an excel file • It provides function that allows the SOE monitoring operation to be independent of Softmaster • It enables data monitoring and saving • SOE monitoring software communicates with the ML series PLC for ease and fast operation of the SOE module • Major Functions of SOE: – – – –
Read/save event history Delete event history View module parameter settings Save event history to excel file
• Files Created in the SOE Monitor:
– .set log file – for the event created by the user. Used mainly to save the event – .xls module event file – created by the user. Used mainly to save the event record to the excel file
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
22
11
Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software 4/25/2012
Honeywell
SOE Monitoring Window • Open SOE Monitoring software: – Monitor SOE Monitoring
Double click CPU Event History option to view the events saved in CPU
Double click Module Event History option to view the events saved in SOE Module
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Saved events are displayed in this area
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
23
Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Debug Menu Select to start/ stop debugging
Go: Runs to the break point Step Over: Runs Step by Step Step Into: Debugs the subroutine Step Out: Step out the subroutine block Go to Cursor: Runs the Cursor position Set/Remove Breakpoints: Sets or Cancels the Breakpoint Breakpoints List: Displays the List of breakpoints specified Breakpoint Conditions: Specifies break conditions
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
24
12
Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Tools Menu Network Manager: Opens SoftMaster Network Manager
3
Start Simulator: Simulated PLC for Master Logic PLC Series
Customize: User can customize the Toolbar Shortcut Settings: Used for Short Key Assignment Options: Used to set Color, Font, Display settings for items shown in Softmaster
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
MasterLogic Software Introduction
25
Honeywell
Ladder Element
Symbol
P
N
Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software 4/25/2012
Name
Description
A Contact (Normally Open)
Input Signal
B Contact (Normally Closed)
Input Signal
A Contact
B Contact
P Contact (Positive Transition Sensing)
Input Signal P Contact
N Contact (Negative Transition Sensing)
Input Signal N Contact
Horizontal Line Vertical Line Fill Horizontal line NOT instruction Contact
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
26
13
Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Ladder Element Symbol
Name
Description
Normal Coil
Input Signal
P Coil
Input Signal
N Coil
Input Signal
Coil P
N S
P Coil
N Coil
Set Coil
Input Signal S Coil
F
Function/FB Extension Function Block Normally Open OR contact Normally Close OR Contact
P
Positive Transition Sensing OR Contact
N
Negative Transition Sensing OR Contact
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
27
Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Status Display
PLC Name: Used to display the selected PLC Name. If several PLCs are in a project, online related instructions are applied to the PLC displayed here
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Warning Display: Used to display the error status in the PLC
Cursor Position Display: Used to display cursor position while editing the program
PLC Mode: Used to display the PLC Mode. If several PLC’s are in a project, the mode of the selected PLC is displayed
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
28
14
Program Edit Mode: Overwrite: Overwrites the selected contact point/ function block with new one Insert: Inserts new contact point/function block by moving existing contact point/function block to the right hand side
Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Project Configuration Window Project which may comprises of several PLCs Global Variable declaration and direct variable text can be edited and Viewed
Used to configure Basic Parameter, I/O parameter, and Redundancy parameter
Used as a folder for all programs User Defined Task with fixed cycle Custom Function/Function Block created by the user. Defines structure type
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
29
Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Function/Function Block Function / Function Block are listed here
Recently used Function / Function Blocks are listed here
Favorite Functions / Function Blocks can be added in this list Most frequently used function blocks can be listed and viewed by this selection
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
30
15
Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software 4/25/2012
3
Single PLC system with CPU module and the connection status
Honeywell
Variable Monitoring Window
•
PLC: Used to display the PLC available for registration. SoftMaster project may be composed of multi-PLC Program: Used to select the program name with a variable to register Variable Name/ Address: Used to enter the name of the variable or address Value: Used to display applicable address value when monitored Type: Displays the type of variable Address/ Variable Name: Selects variable on a list of local variable if the memory is allocated Comment: Displays the variable comments
• • • • • •
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
31
Honeywell
Message Window
• • • • • • •
Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software 4/25/2012
Result: Gives information while writing the program and indicates errors and warnings Check Program: Checks all programs and indicates errors and warnings Find 1 and Find 2: Result of Find Address / Find Text is displayed here Communication: Information like the Date and Time are displayed here Cross Reference : Gives detailed information about the program Used Address: Gives details of the parameter Duplicate Coil: Shows all addresses and the number used in program. Addresses used in each address area, according to designated types, are classified into input and output
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
32
16
Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Program Editor • Program Editor is used to edit the program • Program editor uses four languages to edit the program Instruction List Ladder Diagram SFC ST
MasterLogic Software Introduction
3
– – – –
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
33
Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software 4/25/2012
Honeywell
This page intentionally left blank
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
34
17
Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software 4/25/2012
Describe the Configuration of Basic Parameters
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
35
Honeywell
Introduction •
Describe the Configuration of Basic Parameters 4/25/2012
The Basic parameter settings window is invoked from the Basic Parameter within the ML200R project – Basic Parameters can be set in the following tabs: • Basic Operation Setup • Retain Area Settings • Error Operation Setup
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
36
18
Describe the Configuration of Basic Parameters 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Basic Operation Setup
Output Control settings: Determines if the data should be held/released by ML PLC during these conditions
3
User is able to enable/disable the fixed period operation mode and set the fixed period for the program if enabled Used to configure the Watch Dog time and input filter parameter Configure the PLC restart mode Cold or Warm restart mode
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
37
Describe the Configuration of Basic Parameters 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Basic Operation Setup
Used to disable the Reset and D.CLR switches present in the CPU MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
38
19
Describe the Configuration of Basic Parameters 4/25/2012
Honeywell
SOE Parameters in Basic Parameter Settings • SOE Parameters in the Basic Parameter Settings
Allows to save the latest SOE events. If the events exceeds the 3000 events, then the oldest event gets deleted and the latest event gets saved
Allows to save the initial SOE events to the CPU. If the events count exceeds the 3000 events, then the oldest event is retained and latest events are ignored
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
39
Describe the Configuration of Basic Parameters 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Retain Area Setup
• Parameter RETAIN (%R) is used to retain data values necessary for operation – Data is retained in warm restart of PLC
• User is able to configure part of M area memory as retain memory area (Max. 128 KB) Select the “M area retain setting” check box option to enable the M area retain settings. Enter the Starting and Ending M area address to the Define Retain Memory area. Unit: MWORDS 0 to 65555
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
40
20
Describe the Configuration of Basic Parameters 4/25/2012
If enabled, the PLC continues to run even on the fuse error
If enabled, the PLC continues to run on I/O Module error
If enabled, the PLC runs even if a Communication Module error occurs
If enabled, the PLC continues to run even on Special Module error
If enabled, the PLC runs even if a Extended base error occurs
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
41
Describe the Configuration of Basic Parameters 4/25/2012
Honeywell
This page intentionally left blank
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
42
21
Describe the Configuration of Basic Parameters 4/25/2012
3
Honeywell
Error Operation Setup
Describe the Configuration of IO Parameters
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
43
Describe the Configuration of IO Parameters 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Introduction •
The IO Parameter Setting window is invoked from the IO Parameter item within the ML200R PLC project
•
Components of the IO Parameter Setting dialog box: – Module – Modules configured in the base – Comments – Users Comments – Input Filter – Constant filter value for the input – Emergency Out – Output value when the CPU stops abruptly from RUN – Allocation – The allocation is a fixed type and is always disabled
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
44
22
Describe the Configuration of IO Parameters 4/25/2012
Honeywell
IO Parameter Basics • The I/O Parameter Setting dialog box specifies: – I/O module configuration in the Base Slot location – User configurable parameters for each I/O channel
Slot Information
3
Base Segregation
Module List
Configuration Settings
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
45
Honeywell
Module Assignment •
Base 00 lists the Communications Modules
•
Base 01 – Base 31 lists all modules, inclusive of the Communication Modules, for open connectivity
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Describe the Configuration of IO Parameters 4/25/2012
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
46
23
Describe the Configuration of IO Parameters 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Configuration Options
Delete selected slot
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
47
Describe the Configuration of IO Parameters 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Configuration Details •
Delete Slot
•
Delete Base
•
Base Setting
•
Delete All
•
Details
•
Print
•
OK
– Deletes all information of the currently selected slot. – Deletes all information of the currently selected base. – Sets the base number of the currently selected base. – Deletes the configured module and information of all bases. – Displays detailed module information. – Prints the module type and the module’s parameter information specified in the slot. – Applies the changed items and closes the dialog box.
•
Cancel – Closes the dialog box.
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
48
24
Describe the Configuration of IO Parameters 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Detail Settings for Digital Input and Output module •
Digital Input Module – Specifies the filter constant value for Digital Inputs – Input filter maintains the input signal for the filtering time after the input changes
Digital Output Module
3
•
Detail Settings for Digital Input Module
– Emergency Output Setting specifies the output when the CPU abruptly stops during RUN – The Emergency Output mode can be specified on a per channel basis
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Detail Settings for Digital Output Module
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
49
Describe the Configuration of IO Parameters 4/25/2012
Detail Settings for Analog Input and Output module •
Honeywell
Analog Input / Output Module – Details all the channels’ applicable parameter values – When a parameter value is changed by a user from the default value, the value string color changes from Black to Blue Detail Settings for Analog Output Module
Detail Settings for Analog Input Module
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
50
25
Describe the Configuration of IO Parameters 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Detail Settings – High Speed Counter Modules •
High Speed Counter Modules – Details all the channels’ applicable parameter values – When a parameter value is changed by a user from the default value, the value string color changes from Black to Blue
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
51
Detail Settings – Temperature Measuring Modules •
Describe the Configuration of IO Parameters 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Temperature Measuring Modules – Details all the channels’ applicable parameter values – When a parameter value is changed by a user from the default value, the value string color changes from Black to Blue
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
52
26
Describe the Configuration of IO Parameters 4/25/2012
3
Describe the Configuration of Redundancy Parameters
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
53
Describe the Configuration of Redundancy Parameters 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Introduction • •
The Redundancy Parameter window is invoked from the Projects Window of SoftMaster. Redundancy Parameter’ is the redundancy settings for the ML200R CPU. Double-click the Redundancy Parameter option in the Project Window to open the Redundancy Parameter’ window
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
54
27
Describe the Configuration of Redundancy Parameters 4/25/2012
Redundancy Parameters Configuration
Honeywell
• Redundancy Parameters Configuration is used to configure the redundancy operation of the system. It has two tabs for configuration – Basic Operation Setup – FEnet I/F Operation Setup
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
55
Describe the Configuration of Redundancy Parameters 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Hot Swapping Option
• Hot Swapping: Used to replace the faulty Base or module in the online mode – Base: • When selected, the Base can be replaced online without using the Base Changing Wizard in SoftMaster – Module: • Module can be replaced online without using the Module Changing Wizard in SoftMaster • “Module Detachment Error” does Not appear while replacing the module – Note: If these options are not selected, then the user has to use the Base/Module Changing Wizard option present in the Softmaster to change the module or Base
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
56
28
Describe the Configuration of Redundancy Parameters 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Extended Base Power Failure Setup • Restart and Wait
– If both the Power supply modules of the Extended base is failed, the CPU restarts automatically and waits for error rectification – If both the Power supply modules of the Extended base is failed, the CPU enters into the error state – User has to restart the CPU manually after error rectification
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
57
Honeywell
Warning Options •
Describe the Configuration of Redundancy Parameters 4/25/2012
Disable Warning for Single Power Operation – When selected, the warning message is Not generated when one of the power modules in the expansion base is failed or turned Off
•
Disable Warning for Ring Topology – When selected, the warning message is Not generated when Ring topology in a system is failed or broken
•
Disable Warning message for Single CPU Mode – When selected, the warning message is Not generated when the Master CPU is operating without a standby CPU
•
All options are unchecked by default
Disable warning for fault mask removal – When selected, the warning message is Not generated when the fault mask is removed
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
58
29
Describe the Configuration of Redundancy Parameters 4/25/2012
3
• Base Power Failure Error
Honeywell
Redundancy Synchronization Area • Defines the Start and End memory locations for synchronization – If the ‘Used’ checkbox is enabled, then the data in the selected area is synchronized between the Master and Standby CPU
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
59
Describe the Configuration of Redundancy Parameters 4/25/2012
Honeywell
FENet I/F Operation Setup
• Switching Condition: Configures the switching behavior of the system when the FENet cable is disconnected – Disconnection of the Cable: Master/Standby switchover happens immediately within 1 sec, if this option is selected and FENet cable is disconnected. – Disconnection of the Server Connection: Master/Standby Switchover happens with some delay after the removal of the FENet cable • Note: For Switchover, it requires a healthy Server connection before the removal of cable or cable break
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
60
30
Describe the Configuration of Redundancy Parameters 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Automatic Switchover Option
– Select the check box option for Automatic Switchover (Redundancy operation) – Group the FENet modules installed on the main base to the same or different groups
• Pre-requisites for Automatic master Switchover: – All cables of FENet modules in a group are disconnected – At least one FENet module corresponding to same group in the standby base should be running under normal condition
• If these conditions are satisfied, then only the automatic master Switchover will happen
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
61
Describe the Configuration of Redundancy Parameters 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Automatic Switchover (Redundancy Operation) • Max. 6 groups can be configured.
Max. 6 groups can be configured
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
62
31
Describe the Configuration of Redundancy Parameters 4/25/2012
3
• This option is used to set the condition for the Automatic Master Switchover Operation • Steps to configure the Automatic Master Switchover:
Describe the Basics of Project
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
63
Describe the Basics of Project 4/25/2012
Honeywell
SoftMaster Project Window • Components of the SoftMaster Project Window
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
64
32
Describe the Basics of Project 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Select PLC Type
Enter a name for the ML200R PLC
Select the PLC type
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
65
Describe the Basics of Project 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Basic Parameter Settings
• Basic parameters related to the PLC operation are defined in Basic parameter settings – Example: Watchdog timer, Restart Mode, Fixed Period Operation, etc.
Right click on Basic Parameter and select Open
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
66
33
Describe the Basics of Project 4/25/2012
3
Right-click on the ML200R PLC and select Properties…
Honeywell
I/O Parameter Setting
• ML200R PLC I/O modules are configured in I/O Parameter Settings in the base and slot number positions – Types: Communication Modules, Special Modules and Digital Modules – Define settings for each channel of I/O Modules
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
67
Describe the Basics of Project 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Redundancy Parameter • Set redundancy-related parameters – Warning Options – Redundancy synchronization areas
Double click on ‘Redundancy Parameter’ to open the Redundancy Parameter window
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
68
34
Describe the Basics of Project 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Scan Program
• All programs defined for the ML200R PLC are located under the Scan Program item in the Project Window – Each program contains Local Variables and a Program
3
To add a program, right-click on Scan Program and select Add Item > Program
Enter the program name and programming language to be used
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
69
Describe the Basics of Project 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Programming Languages • Ladder Diagram • Sequential Function Chart (SFC) • Structured Text (ST) Ladder Diagram
Structured Text
Sequential Function Chart
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
70
35
Describe the Basics of Project 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Global Variable/Addresses
• Global Variables are available for use in every program defined in a project – Global Variables contain information regarding Special Modules
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Describe the Basics of Project 4/25/2012
71
Honeywell
Variables in Global Variables List
• After adding a Special Module to the I/O Parameter list, the Special Modules’ specific parameters are updated/registered in the Global Variables List Add a Special Module to the I/O Parameter List
1
Select All Check Box option or select checkbox against required bases
Click OK
Click OK
3
MasterLogic Software Introduction
2 Click Yes
Special Module parameters get registered in the Global Variable list
4
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
72
36
Describe the Basics of Project 4/25/2012
Honeywell Variables in Global Variable List • If Special Module parameters are not registered automatically to the Global Variable list they can be added manually – Click Edit Register Special Module Variables
1
Special Module parameters get registered in the Global Variable list
MasterLogic Software Introduction
4
3
2
3
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
73
Describe the Basics of Project 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Local Variables
• Local Variables are available for use only with their associated Program under the ‘Scan Program’ item in which they are declared
Local Variables defined for the Ladder Program can be used for configuration only in that particular program
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
74
37
Describe the Basics of Project 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Copy Global Variables to Local Variables •
To use a Global Variable as a Local Variable, it must be added to the Local Variable list – In the Local Variables window, right click and select ‘Add EXTERNAL variable…’ – The ‘Add EXTERNAL Variable’ option is also available in the Edit menu in SoftMaster Global Variables get added to the Local Variable list
Select the variables to be added or click ‘Select All’ to select all Global Variables and click OK
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
75
Describe the Basics of Project 4/25/2012
Honeywell
User Data Types
• Users can create new data types to be used in the Program file
Right click on the User Data Type and select Add Item > Data type
Enter a Name and Comment for the data type
Define the Variables for the data type
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
76
38
Describe the Basics of Project 4/25/2012
Honeywell
User Data Type • Use of the data type in a Program
3
To use the data type in a Program, define a variable in the Local Variables
Use the data type in a Program MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
77
Describe the Basics of Project 4/25/2012
Honeywell
User Functions
• Users can define Functions/Function Blocks to be used in a Program – Each user-defined function contains Local Variables and a Program Create the Function
Use the Function
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
78
39
Describe the Basics of Project 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Function / Function Block •
Basic Structure
Power in (Enabling F/FB)
Input items
# of INPUTS
EN
ENO
IN1
OUT1
IN2
OUT2
IN3
OUT3
Power out or F/FB Execution Result Output/Result items
Function
Function Block
One or more
One or more
# of OUTPUTS
Only One
One or more
Execution
Completed within 1 scan
Completed within 1 or more scan
Instruction examples
MOV/BCDADD/SUB/MUL/DIV/EQ /GT/GE/LT/LE etc…
TON (On-delay Timer) CTU (Counter) etc…
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Describe the Basics of Project 4/25/2012
79
Honeywell
Function / Function Block • Circuit Connection Conventions Correct Circuit %QX0.1.0
%IX0.0.0
Wrong Circuit %QX0.1.0
%IX0.0.0
%QX0.1.0
%IX0.0.0
%IX0.0.0
%QX0.1.0 %QX0.1.1 %MW3 %MX0
F/FB
%QX0.1.1
%MW3
%MW10
%MX0
%IX0.0.1
F/FB
%QX0.1.1 %MW3 %MX0 %IX0.0.1
%MW10
%IX0.0.1
F/FB
Coil contact cannot be connected to a non-electric output
MasterLogic Software Introduction
%QX0.1.1
%MW3
%MW10
%MX0 %IX0.0.1
F/FB
%MW10
Normally Open contact cannot be connected to a non-electric input
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
80
40
Describe the Basics of Project 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Function Block in a Program
• Open the Program from the Scan Program item in the Project Window
3
– Configure the variables in the Local Variable list – Select the Function Block from the window and insert it in a Program
2 3
1
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
81
Describe the Basics of Project 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Task •
A Task is a PLC program that executes only when the specific execution conditions occur
Runs once to set variables
– A Task program does not reiteratively process like a PLC Scan Program
Scan Program
Runs periodically
Initial Task
•
There are two types of Task Programs:
Cyclic Task Internal Task
– Time-driven Interrupt Task program • Executes on a preset periodic basis – Internal Device Interrupt Task program • Executes when a preset condition is true
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Executes when condition is true
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
82
41
Describe the Basics of Project 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Task Processing Power ON Initial Task (INI) Input Refresh Program 1
Executes periodically
Cyclic Task (TIME)
Program 2 Condition ON !!
Internal Task (INTERNAL)
Program 3
Output Refresh End Processing
Item Prog ram
# of Task
Execution Condition
Remarks
256 – Task
At every scan
Each program is executed in sequence of registration
Initial
1
At initial state
Cyclic
32
At every cycle time
Internal
32
On Internal Condition is TRUE
Scan Program Task Prog ram
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
83
Describe the Basics of Project 4/25/2012
Honeywell
This page intentionally left blank
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
84
42
Describe the Basics of Project 4/25/2012
3
Describe simulation in SoftMaster
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
85
Describe simulation in SoftMaster 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Introduction • SoftMaster - SIM is available with SoftMaster – Using SoftMaster - SIM • Programs can run without a physical ML200R PLC • Programs can be debugged using input condition settings or module simulation functions
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
86
43
Describe simulation in SoftMaster 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Functions Supported by SoftMaster - SIM • SoftMaster – SIM supports
– Program Simulation • Simulation of programs such as LD/SFC/ST written in SoftMaster • Online editing and debugging – PLC Online Functions • Program monitoring and online diagnostics functions such as system monitoring, address monitoring, trend monitoring, data trace and custom events – Module Simulation • Simulation for various I/O modules such as Digital I/O, A/D Conversion, D/A Conversion, Counter, Temperature Control, and Positioning • Input value of each module can be set through simulation – I/O Input Condition Settings • Set data values in a program when a specific condition is met • Set data values once/continuously • Used to test PLC programs
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
87
Describe simulation in SoftMaster 4/25/2012
Honeywell
System Requirements for SoftMaster - SIM • Minimum system requirements to run SoftMaster - SIM – Pentium 3 900MHz, RAM 256MB
• Recommended system requirements to run SoftMaster - SIM – Pentium 4 1.5GHz, RAM 512MB (or more)
• Disconnection may occur in the following cases: – When using a system with minimum specification to run SoftMaster - SIM • Fixed period scan may not operate properly because the scan period may be longer than the fixed period – If the system is configured to use ‘Sleep’ mode – If the system load is heavy
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
88
44
Describe simulation in SoftMaster 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Launch and Start SoftMaster - SIM
• Open the ML200R program to be run in simulation mode in SoftMaster
3
– Select Tools Start Simulator
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
89
Describe simulation in SoftMaster 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Launch and Start SoftMaster - SIM
Select ‘OK’ in the ‘Write’ window to download the program into SoftMaster – SIM for simulation
Representation of the SoftMaster – SIM PLC
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
90
45
Describe simulation in SoftMaster 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Basic View of SoftMaster - SIM • SoftMaster - SIM window
Modules: BX stands for base number; SXX stands for slot number
– Change channel values – Specify I/O conditions
Single and Continuous I/O conditions
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
91
Describe simulation in SoftMaster 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Open I/O Module in SoftMaster – SIM
I/O defined in the program automatically appear in SoftMaster – SIM. Right-click and select ‘Open Item’
To view/change the Channel Value, select the ‘Start/Termination of the Channel Monitor Button Change Values
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
92
46
Describe simulation in SoftMaster 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Change Values from SoftMaster – SIM
Change the I/O values in the program by changing the associated Channel Value from SoftMaster - SIM
Double-click on the Channel Value
Click ‘OK’ to change the value
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
93
Describe simulation in SoftMaster 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Change Values from SoftMaster – SIM Value changes in the program and the logic runs
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
94
47
Describe simulation in SoftMaster 4/25/2012
3
Change the program to ‘Run’ mode in SoftMaster
Honeywell
Single I/O Condition •
Basic Setting tab – Double-click a ‘Condition’ channel to open the condition settings dialog box • Enter Name and Description of the condition • Execution Options – Always execute: regardless of the condition set, the output is executed on start – Execute by button: executes the output setting by pressing a button – Execute by condition expression: execute the output setting when a specific condition is satisfied
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
95
Describe simulation in SoftMaster 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Single I/O Condition • Output Setting tab – Set the address/channel number and the value to be set when the input condition is executed • Use the ‘View Channel Browser’ button to set the output address
• Select the button ‘Application / Cancellation of a single I/O condition’ to apply/disable the I/O condition If the execute option ‘Execute by button’ is used, an ‘Action’ button appears. When this button is clicked, the condition is executed I/O Condition is grayed out and is not available for editing
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
96
48
Describe simulation in SoftMaster 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Continuous I/O Condition • Basic Setting – Similar to Single I/O Condition Basic Setting
• Output Setting
3
– Repeated Execution – Ignore Condition while execution
Click here to select Channel Address Enter values to be continuously sent to channel. Up to 199 values can be set
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Describe simulation in SoftMaster 4/25/2012
97
Honeywell
Continuous I/O Condition Settings Continuous Value Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Value
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
No.
Execute Option
Ignore Condition While Execution
Repeated Execution
Result
1
Execute by button or Execute by condition (expression is false)
Not Set
Not Set
Only the first value ‘10’ will be written 7 times
2
Always Execute or Execute by condition (expression is true)
Not Set
Not Set
Values will be continuously written as 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
3
Always Execute or Execute by condition (expression is true)
Set
Not Set
Values will be written as 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
4
Execute by button or Execute by condition (expression is false)
Not Set
Set
Values will be continuously written as 10 → 10 → 10 → 10 → 10 → 10 → 10 → 10...
5
Always Execute or Execute by condition (expression is true)
Not Set
Set
Values will be continuously set as 10 20 30 40 50 60 7010 20 30 40 50 60 70….
6
Always Execute or Execute by condition (expression is true)
Set
Set
Values will be continuously set as 10 20 30 40 50 60 7010 20 30 40 50 60 70….
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
98
49
Describe simulation in SoftMaster 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Continuous I/O Condition • Select the button ‘Application/Cancellation of continuous I/O condition’ to apply/disable the continuous I/O condition
I/O condition is grayed out and is not available for editing
MasterLogic Software Introduction
If the execute option ‘Execute by button’ is used, an ‘Action’ button appears. When this button is clicked, the condition is executed
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
99
Describe simulation in SoftMaster 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Save I/O Conditions
• I/O conditions configured in SoftMaster - SIM need to be saved before exiting SoftMaster - SIM – Select File Save I/O Condition As… – Select a location, enter a file name and save with an .xic extension
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
100
50
Describe simulation in SoftMaster 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Limitations of SoftMaster - SIM
• SoftMaster - SIM can be used to simulate only a non-redundant ML200 PLC and not a redundant ML200R PLC
3
• SoftMaster - SIM doesn’t support functions related to Communication Modules
• In a physical ML200R PLC a watchdog timer can be set to prevent errors – In SoftMaster - SIM, watchdog timer does not work since scan time in SoftMaster - SIM is longer than in a physical ML PLC
• SoftMaster - SIM does not support all I/O modules defined in SoftMaster – For more details refer to the SoftMaster User's Guide
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
101
Describe simulation in SoftMaster 4/25/2012
Honeywell
This page intentionally left blank
MasterLogic Software Introduction
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
102
51
Describe simulation in SoftMaster 4/25/2012
This page was intentionally left blank.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
Topic: MasterLogic Software Introduction Contents
3
Configure ML200R using SoftMaster ....................................................................................................3
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
1
This page was intentionally left blank.
2
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Software Introduction Configure ML200R using SoftMaster
Configure ML200R using SoftMaster Practice Objective
3
The objective of this LAB is to demonstrate the creation and simulation of logic in the ML200R PLC. Prerequisites Experion Server or Client machine with Experion Engineering Tools loaded on it. Introduction In this lab, you will perform the following: •
Create a new project
•
Add a CPU, Digital Input, and Digital Output
•
Configure a Rack, CPU, Input and Output
•
Create Ladder logic
•
Simulate the logic using the SoftMaster Simulator
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
3
MasterLogic Software Introduction Configure ML200R using SoftMaster
4
Step
Action
1
Open SoftMaster from Start All Programs SoftMaster SoftMaster
2
Select “New Project…” from the Project Menu.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Software Introduction Configure ML200R using SoftMaster
Step 3
Action Enter the details of the new Project as shown: Project Name: ConfigureDIO File directory: Default PLC Series: ML-200R Program name: DIO_Simulation
3
Leave all other settings at their default values. Click OK.
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
5
MasterLogic Software Introduction Configure ML200R using SoftMaster
Step 4
Action Right-click on I/O Parameter under the new PLC project > Parameter. Select Open.
6
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Software Introduction Configure ML200R using SoftMaster
Step
The I/O Parameter Setting dialog box opens. No I/O modules will be configured on Base 00.
3
5
Action
ATTENTION In actual hardware, all communication modules would be configured on Base 00.
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
7
MasterLogic Software Introduction Configure ML200R using SoftMaster
Step 6
Action Open/expand Base 01. In Slot 0, click the Module drop-down box. Expand Digital Module List Input module and double click on DC 24V INPUT, 32points
ATTENTION To add a module, double-click on the module.
8
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Software Introduction Configure ML200R using SoftMaster
Step
In Slot 1, click the Module drop-down box. Expand Digital Module List Output Module and double click on TR OUTPUT, 32points
3
7
Action
Click OK. 8
Now we will create the first Ladder Rung. Select a Normally Open Contact (F3) Column 0 in the Program window.
4/25/2012
from the LD Toolbar and click on Row 0,
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
9
MasterLogic Software Introduction Configure ML200R using SoftMaster
Step 9
Action The Select Variable dialog box opens. Enter the following: Variable: START. Variable List Type: Local Variable Leave the rest of the values as default.
Click OK.
10
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Software Introduction Configure ML200R using SoftMaster
Step 10
Action This opens the Variable Name Add dialog box. Enter the following;
3
Address: %IX1.0.0
Click OK in the Variable Name Add dialog boxes and in the Select Variable dialog boxes.
ATTENTION This address indicates that the variable is of the type “Input,” located at Base 01, Slot 00. The last zero indicates the Channel number of the Digital Input. If the Address is not set, the variable will be saved automatically in the symbolic area (%A).
11 From the SoftMaster LD Toolbar, select a Coil (F9) window.
4/25/2012
and click in the Program
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
11
MasterLogic Software Introduction Configure ML200R using SoftMaster
Step 12
Action In the Select Variable dialog box, enter the following: Variable Name: RELAY Variable List Type: Local Variable Leave the rest of the values as default.
Click OK.
12
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Software Introduction Configure ML200R using SoftMaster
Step 13
Action Enter the following in the Variable Name Add dialog box:
3
Address: %QX1.1.0
Click OK in the Variable Name Add and the Select Variable dialog boxes. ATTENTION This address indicates that the variable is of type “Output,” located at Base 01, Slot 01. The last zero indicates the Channel number of the Digital Output. If the Address is not set, the variable will be saved automatically in the symbolic area (%A).
14
4/25/2012
This completes the first Rung of the Ladder Program. This program will be executed in the simulator.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
13
MasterLogic Software Introduction Configure ML200R using SoftMaster
Step
Action
15
Click View Check Program.
16
Keep all default selections in the Program Check dialog box.
Click OK.
14
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Software Introduction Configure ML200R using SoftMaster
Step
View the Program results in the Check Program tab Message Window.
3
17
Action
ATTENTION Steps 15, 16, 17 are not required in a simulation environment because the program is automatically executed. 18
4/25/2012
In the SoftMaster window, click Tools Start Simulator.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
15
MasterLogic Software Introduction Configure ML200R using SoftMaster
Step 19
Action The SoftMaster-SIM window opens. The Write dialog-box opens (may take a few seconds)
Click OK on the Write dialog-box. ATTENTION The Write dialog box is visible after the SoftMasterSIM window opens completely. A Warning message may occur indicating Invalid configuration of redundancy System and a Fault Mask Error. Ignore this warning message by clicking Close on the Error/ Warning- New PLC Dialog box. 20
16
Click OK to acknowledge the Write completion.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Software Introduction Configure ML200R using SoftMaster Step
Action
21
In the SoftMaster window, select Online Change Mode Run.
22
Click Yes in response to “Change to Run mode?”
23
Open the SoftMaster-SIM window if not already open (See System Tray if not in on Task Bar)
3
In the Channel List, double click on the Digital Input Module located in Base 01 Slot 00 (B1S00: DC24V Input 8-Point)
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
17
MasterLogic Software Introduction Configure ML200R using SoftMaster
18
Step
Action
24
In the SoftMaster-SIM window, select Tools Start Channel Monitoring.
25
Online Digital Input values will be displayed in Red under the Channel Value heading.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Software Introduction Configure ML200R using SoftMaster Step
Action
26
Double click on the Channel Value of Channel No 1 (B1S00.IN00) to invoke the Channel Value Modification dialog box.
3
Change the state of Digital Input to ON and click OK.
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
19
MasterLogic Software Introduction Configure ML200R using SoftMaster
20
Step
Action
27
Observe that the Normally Open Contact in the Ladder diagram is now closed.
28
Once the logic is checked using the simulator, select Tools Stop Simulator.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Software Introduction Configure ML200R using SoftMaster
Step
Action
Download Program to Controller 29
In SoftMaster, select Online Connection Settings
30
In Online Settings, select USB
3
Click Connect
31
SoftMaster gets connected to PLC
32
Select the Online Write option Keep the default selection. Click OK
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
21
MasterLogic Software Introduction Configure ML200R using SoftMaster
Step
Action
33
If this message appears, select Yes
34
Once writing is complete, the following message will appear. Click Yes
ATTENTION You may see ‘Module Mismatch error’ if the I/O modules defined in I/O parameters does not match with the actual modules in base. You will see Fault Mask Remove warning as Fault mask is not set for I/O modules in class.
22
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
4
Describe the Import/Export Option
Additional MasterLogic Software Options
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
1
Describe the Import/Export Option 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Introduction •
PLC and Project items can be exported from or imported in to a Project in SoftMaster.
•
Export / Import functionality is implemented for backup purposes.
Additional MasterLogic Software Options
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
2
1
Describe the Import/Export Option 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Import/Export Item File Extensions •
The following items can be exported from / imported in to SoftMaster: – – – – – –
PLC Global Variables / Address Basic Parameter I/O Parameter Program User Function / Function Block
Item
File Extension
PLC
plc
Global Variables / Address
gdv
Basic Parameter
bsp
I/O Parameter
iop
Program
pri
User Function / Function Block
fun
Additional MasterLogic Software Options
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
3
Describe the Import/Export Option 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Export File •
Select an item in the Project window, then…
•
Right-click on item in the Project and select, Export to File…
– Select the Project menu in SoftMaster and click the Export to File… option
Additional MasterLogic Software Options
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4
2
Describe the Import/Export Option 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Import File
• Select the Project menu in SoftMaster, and select the Import Item from File option – Then select the item to be imported
• Right-click on an item in the Project and select, Import from File…
4
– Then select the item to be imported
Additional MasterLogic Software Options
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
5
Describe the Import/Export Option 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Import Considerations • Importing is retrieving items from saved files
– On Import -- Global Variable/Address, Basic parameter, I/O parameter, Program, and User Function / Function Blocks will overwrite previous items – On overwrite -- the contents of the existing item is deleted
Additional MasterLogic Software Options
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
6
3
Describe the Import/Export Option 2/2/2012
Describe the Compare Project Option
Additional MasterLogic Software Options
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
7
Describe the Compare Project Option 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
• Two SoftMaster projects can be compared to view differences with respect to specific items in the project
Project being edited
Additional MasterLogic Software Options
Project for comparison
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
8
4
Describe the Compare Project Option 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Open Compare Projects Window •
With the original project open in SoftMaster – Select Project Compare Projects… from the menu bar
•
In the Compare Projects window that appears, click the ‘Open Project…’ button
4
• Browse to open the project file to be compared with the current project
Project being edited
Additional MasterLogic Software Options
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
9
Describe the Compare Project Option 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Compare Projects • Click the ‘Compare’ button
Project comparison results are displayed in the Result tab of the Message Window
Additional MasterLogic Software Options
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
10
5
Describe the Compare Project Option 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Comparison Results
• Results of compared projects are listed in the Result tab in Message Window
Additional MasterLogic Software Options
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
11
Describe the Compare Project Option 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Compare Projects With Different Items • Items to be compared should be available in both the projects
Additional MasterLogic Software Options
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
12
6
Describe the Compare Project Option 2/2/2012
4
Describe the System Requirements of Other Software
Additional MasterLogic Software Options
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
13
Describe the System Requirements of Other Software 2/2/2012
Honeywell
System Requirements for SyCon
• SyCon Software is required for configuring Profibus-DP and DeviceNet modules in the ML200R PLC • System Requirement for SyCon: – PC with Pentium processor or higher – OS: Windows 95 / 98 / NT / 2000 / XP – Free disk space: Minimum 10 MB – RAM: Minimum 16 MB – Graphic resolution: 800 x 600 pixel or higher
Additional MasterLogic Software Options
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
14
7
Describe the System Requirements of Other Software 2/2/2012
This page was intentionally left blank.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
MasterLogic Programming Languages
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
1
Describe the different Programming Languages 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
• ML200R supports the following IEC (International Electro-technical Commission) 61131-3 Programming Languages: – Ladder Diagram (LD) • Graphical language based on ladder logic – Sequential Function Chart (SFC) • Logic is implemented in the form of steps (actions) and transitions (conditions) – Structured Text (ST) – Instruction List (IL)
MasterLogic Programming Languages
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
2
1
Describe the different Programming Languages 4/25/2012
5
Describe the different Programming Languages
Honeywell
Ladder Diagram • An IEC 61131-3 Standard Programming Language • Used to create logic for relay, timer and counter operations • User-friendly graphical editor for creating ladder diagrams
MasterLogic Programming Languages
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
3
Describe the different Programming Languages 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Ladder Diagram - Edit Tools
Editing Toolbar
Programming area
MasterLogic Programming Languages
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4
2
Describe the different Programming Languages 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Ladder Diagram - Example • Ladder Diagram Components Function Block
Function
Horizontal Link
Rung
MasterLogic Programming Languages
Contact
Vertical Link
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
5
Jump Label
Describe the different Programming Languages 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Ladder Diagram Components • Bus Line
– A ‘Bus Line’ is a power line vertically placed on both sides of a ladder diagram – Every ladder diagram must contain bus lines – Two types • Left Bus Line – Value is always 1
• Right Bus Line – Value is not fixed
MasterLogic Programming Languages
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
6
3
Describe the different Programming Languages 4/25/2012
5
Bus Line
Honeywell
Ladder Diagram Components •
Link
– Horizontal Link • Used to connect components horizontally • Transmits the signal from the left side to the right side – Vertical Link • Used to connect components vertically • Performs a logical OR function of two horizontal links which are connected using a vertical link
•
Contact
– A contact operates like an electric switch and transmits a signal over a horizontal link – Two types • Normally Open (NO) • Normally Closed (NC)
MasterLogic Programming Languages
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
7
Describe the different Programming Languages 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Ladder Diagram Components • Coil
– Stores the value of the signal on the left side of a horizontal link – Acts like an output device – Two types • Momentary – When the left side horizontal link is ON, the coil stores ON momentarily NO
NC
• Latched Set Reset – When the left side horizontal link is ON, the coil stores ON until reseted by a reset coil
MasterLogic Programming Languages
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
8
4
Describe the different Programming Languages 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Ladder Diagram Components • Functions and Function Blocks
– Operations like swap, select, type convert, etc. are pre-defined and available as directly usable functions – Pre-defined function blocks are provided for counting and timing operations – Users can create custom functions / function blocks based on requirements
MasterLogic Programming Languages
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
9
Describe the different Programming Languages 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Ladder Diagram - Monitoring Coil in OFF state
Contact in OFF state
Contact in ON state
Coil in ON state
Note: Refer reference section in the course for more information on Ladder Diagram Programming MasterLogic Programming Languages
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
10
5
Describe the different Programming Languages 4/25/2012
5
Note: Refer reference section in the course for more information on Function Blocks
Honeywell
Sequential Function Chart (SFC) • An IEC 61131-3 Standard Programming Language • Suitable for batch applications
• Used to control the execution sequence of other programs like LD, IL etc.
SFC Toolbar
MasterLogic Programming Languages
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
11
Sequential Function Chart - Example • Sequential Function Chart Components Initial Step
Describe the different Programming Languages 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Action
Action Qualifiers
Transition
MasterLogic Programming Languages
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
12
6
Describe the different Programming Languages 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Sequential Control Chart - Components • Step – When a step is active, the actions connected to it get executed – One step can have a maximum of 2 actions – A step without action is considered a ‘waiting’ step
• Transition – – – –
Conditional expression between two steps Transition condition is in the form of a Ladder Diagram or Instruction List The result of a transition condition must always be in BOOL (Boolean) form In the example shown below, step S2 is executed when TRANS coil becomes active (1) • TRANS is an internally declared variable
MasterLogic Programming Languages
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
13
Sequential Control Chart - Components
Describe the different Programming Languages 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Steps and transitions can be associated with Boolean variables
MasterLogic Programming Languages
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
14
7
Describe the different Programming Languages 4/25/2012
5
TRAN1
Honeywell
Sequential Control Chart - Components • Action
– Action takes the form of PLC language: Ladder Diagram, Instruction List etc. – Action qualifiers are used to control the Action – In the example shown below, when S1 is activated: – Action 1 gets executed – Action 2 gets executed even if S1 is inactivated • It stops the execution only when an action with an R qualifier is executed
Action1
Action qualifiers N: Not Stored S: Stored Action2
MasterLogic Programming Languages
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
15
Describe the different Programming Languages 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Sequential Control Chart - Action Qualifiers • Every action is associated with an ‘Action’ qualifier • Action qualifiers:
– Decide the starting point to execute the action – Decide the time at which the action is executed
• SFC consists of the following action qualifiers: – – – – – – – – –
N (Not stored) S (Set) R (Reset) L (Time limited) D (Time delayed) P (Pulse) SD (Stored and Time delayed) DS (Delayed and Stored) SL (Stored and Time limited)
MasterLogic Programming Languages
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
16
8
Describe the different Programming Languages 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Sequential Function Chart - Monitoring
Active Action
Active Step
MasterLogic Programming Languages
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
17
Describe the different Programming Languages 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Structured Text (ST) • An IEC 61131-3 Standard Programming Language • Reduces engineering and is easy to understand
• Generally used for creating user-defined functions/function blocks • Compatible with other IEC languages
MasterLogic Programming Languages
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
18
9
Describe the different Programming Languages 4/25/2012
5
Details of the Action in Ladder diagram form
Honeywell
Structured Text - Example Syntax Coloring
Break points
Auto tabular (indentation) Monitoring Window Split View Bookmarker
Tool tip Support Auto Identifier
MasterLogic Programming Languages
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
19
Describe the different Programming Languages 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Structured Text - Monitoring The values of variables can be changed and the program tested
Online mode
Offline mode MasterLogic Programming Languages
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
20
10
Describe the different Programming Languages 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Instruction List (IL) • An IEC 61131-3 Standard Programming Language • A mnemonic programming language • View-only mode
MasterLogic Programming Languages
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
21
Describe the different Programming Languages 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Instruction List
Click to open Instruction List
MasterLogic Programming Languages
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
22
11
Describe the different Programming Languages 4/25/2012
5
– Programs written in LD can be viewed in IL
Describe a Typical Control Logic Statement
MasterLogic Programming Languages
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
23
Describe a Typical Control Logic Statement 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Introduction • Control logic can be implemented using
– Ladder Diagrams – Structured Text – Sequential Function Charts • Programs added as a sub-routine written in Ladder Diagram or Structured Text
• Example: How to implement a PID Control Loop using Ladder Diagrams and Function Blocks
MasterLogic Programming Languages
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
24
12
Describe a Typical Control Logic Statement 4/25/2012
Honeywell
PID Control LOOP
User
CPU
MV_Manual
User
Manual SV (SP) PV
MV
PID Operation
Auto MV(PV)
DA Conversion Module AD Conversion Module
Driver
Object Control
Sense
(Process sensor)
• Proportional-Integral-Derivative (PID) Control is implemented in the ML200R CPU as a LOOP – A LOOP is a collection of the following Objects: • A sensor detecting the current state of an object to control (PV) • A control operation (PID Control) • A driver to drive the object according to the output (Control Signal)
MasterLogic Programming Languages
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
25
Describe a Typical Control Logic Statement 4/25/2012
Honeywell
PID Closed Loop - Example • Use a single ProportionalIntegration-Derivative (PID) Block to control the system – Input from a Water Level sensor connected to an Analog Input Module (2MLF-AV8A) • Input configured at Base-01, Slot-1, Channel-3
Control System
2MLF-AV8A
2MLF-DV4A
– Output to a Pump connected to an Analog Output Module (2MLF-DV4A) • Output configured at Base01, Slot-3, Channel-2
MasterLogic Programming Languages
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
26
13
Describe a Typical Control Logic Statement 4/25/2012
5
• A maximum of 256 loops (32 LOOPS in 8 BLOCKS) can be created in the ML200R CPU
Honeywell
Analog Input Module Settings
Add Analog Input and Analog Output Modules at Base 01
•
I/O Parameter Setting dialog box is invoked from the Project Window – Input and Output Modules to be used for PID control in the Program are configured in the I/O Parameter Setting dialog box
MasterLogic Programming Languages
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
27
Describe a Typical Control Logic Statement 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Analog Input/Output Module Setting Analog Input Module settings
Enable channel and configure channel settings
Analog Output Module settings
• Channel-3 of the Analog Input Module is enabled and the channel parameters are configured • Channel-2 of the Analog Output Module is enabled and the channel parameters are configured MasterLogic Programming Languages
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
28
14
Describe a Typical Control Logic Statement 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Add Information to Global Variables • Global Variables contain information for Special Modules
MasterLogic Programming Languages
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
29
Describe a Typical Control Logic Statement 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Global Variables
• If changes are made to the parameters which are part of the Global Variables, the changed parameters are overwritten • No user-defined data in the Global Variables is deleted
MasterLogic Programming Languages
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
30
15
Describe a Typical Control Logic Statement 4/25/2012
5
– Once Global Variables are defined in a SoftMaster Project, they can be used in different programs defined in the project • Analog Input and Analog Output modules belong to the Special Module List
Honeywell
Copy Global Variables to Local Variables
• PID Configuration requires all Analog parameters to be available in the Local Variables of a Ladder Program – Copy all variables from the Global Variables list to the Local Variables list • Right-click on Local Variable and select ‘Add External Variable…’ • Click ‘Select All’ and Click ‘OK’ Local Variables List
Global Variables list
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
MasterLogic Programming Languages
31
Describe a Typical Control Logic Statement 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Add PID Function Block • Add a PID Function Block to the program
Enter the Name PIDRUN and click ‘Search’
Select the List Type of ‘Function Block’
Select the Category ‘Control/Detection’
Enter Instance Name
View Function Information
MasterLogic Programming Languages
Click OK
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
32
16
Describe a Typical Control Logic Statement 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Add PID Function Block (Contd.)
MasterLogic Programming Languages
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
33
Describe a Typical Control Logic Statement 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Add Move Function Blocks • Similarly add two MOVE Function Blocks to the program – The Move Function Block moves data connected to an ‘IN’ Parameter to an ‘Out’ Parameter – In this example, the MOVE Function is used to transfer physical IO values to Loop Inputs-Outputs
MasterLogic Programming Languages
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
34
17
Describe a Typical Control Logic Statement 4/25/2012
5
• Assign a Variable Name and select the type as Local Variable. Click OK
Honeywell
Configure Block and Loop Number • Block Number and Loop Number help to identify the PID Block in PID Monitoring
MasterLogic Programming Languages
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
35
Describe a Typical Control Logic Statement 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Make Connections • Configure the Addresses / Parameters on the Function Blocks Connect ‘IN’ of the Move Function Block to the data variable of I/O Module 1 Channel 3
Connect ‘OUT’ of the Move Function Block to the PV of the PID Block
MasterLogic Programming Languages
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
36
18
Describe a Typical Control Logic Statement 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Make Connections
• Similarly, configure connections from the PID Block to the Move Function Block and download the program to the ML200R PLC 1
Input is from a channel in an Analog Input Module
2
Output to the PV of a PID Block
3
Add a Normally open contact to operate the PID
MasterLogic Programming Languages
4
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
37
Output is to a channel of the Analog Output Module
Describe a Typical Control Logic Statement 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Monitor PID Operation
• Open a PID Monitoring window in SoftMaster from Monitor PID Monitoring Select the Block0 and Loop0 PID Block
PID Trend
Change the SP, Tuning Parameters, Range and other parameters from the Setting View MasterLogic Programming Languages
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
38
19
Describe a Typical Control Logic Statement 4/25/2012
5
6 Output from the PID Block
Honeywell
PID Parameters Memory Addresses • PID parameters are stored in %K area in data memory – Table below lists addresses for some parameters of three loops Parameter Loop
PV
OP
SP
Proportional Gain
Integral time
Derivative time
Block 0 Loop 0
_PID0_00PV (Address: %KW38)
_PID0_00MV (Address: %KW40)
_PID0_00SV (Address: %KW24)
_PID0_00K_p (Address: %KD13)
_PID0_00T_i (Address: %KD14)
_PID0_00T_d (Address: %KD15)
Block 1 Loop 2
_PID1_02PV (Address: %KW1152)
_PID1_02MV (Address: %KW1154)
_PID1_02SV (Address: %KW1138)
_PID1_02K_p (Address: %KD70)
_PID1_02T_i (Address: %KD71)
_PID1_02T_d (Address: %K72)
Block 2 Loop 4
_PID2_04PV (Address: %KW2266)
_PID2_04MV (Address: %KW2268)
_PID2_04SV (Address: %KW2252)
_PID2_04K_p (Address: %KD1127)
_PID2_04T_i (Address: %KD1128)
_PID2_04T_d (Address: %K1129)
In Global Variables page on Flag tab select Flag type as PID Memory addresses for all parameters for all 256 PID loops are listed MasterLogic Programming Languages
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
39
Describe a Typical Control Logic Statement 4/25/2012
Honeywell
This page intentionally left blank
MasterLogic Programming Languages
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
40
20
Describe a Typical Control Logic Statement 4/25/2012
Topic: MasterLogic Programming Languages Contents Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster .............................................................................3 Create and Implement Analog Control Logic Using SoftMaster ..........................................................33 Create Program Using ST ...................................................................................................................53 Create Program Using SFC .................................................................................................................63 Create User Defined Function / Function Blocks ................................................................................77
5
Create User Defined Data Types ........................................................................................................95
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
1
This page was intentionally left blank.
2
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster
Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster Objective The objective of this LAB is to demonstrate the creation and simulation of a Discrete Logic in the ML200R PLC. Prerequisites •
Soft Master installed and configured on the Experion Server
Introduction •
In this lab, you will perform the following: o Understand the process mentioned below which needs to be implemented o Create I/O listing o Develop Ladder Logic to implement the process 5
o Simulate the Ladder Logic using Soft Master simulator o Monitor and operate the simulated I/O
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
3
MasterLogic Programming Languages Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster
Process:
Create Control Logic with the Ladder diagram for the Elevator example as shown in the schematic. The following hardware specifications define the equipment used in the Elevator; Output Elements: M1 = Motor to drive the platform UP M2 = Motor to drive the platform DOWN Input Elements: LS1 = NC limit switch to indicate the UP position LS2 = NC limit switch to indicate the DOWN position START = NO push-button for START STOP = NO push-button for STOP UP = NO push-button for UP command DOWN = NO push-button for DOWN command
4
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster
The following narrative description indicates the required sequence of events for the Elevator System: 1. When the START button is pushed, the platform is driven to the DOWN position. 2. When the STOP button is pushed, the platform is halted at whatever position it occupies at that time. 3. When the UP button is pushed, the platform, if it is not in DOWN motion, is driven to the UP position. 4. When the DOWN button is pushed, the platform, if it is not in UP motion, is driven to the DOWN position. Explanation: The START button latching logic will initially be created by using the following variables:
5
PB1 for Start LS2 for DOWN position CR1 as Contact Relay for START button latching MOTOR2 for DOWN motion The STOP sequence logic, along with the master control for the entire system will then be created by using the following variables: PB2 for Stop CR2 as Contact Relay for STOP button latching CR3 as Master control for entire system The Up-Down sequence logic for the platform using variables: PB3 for Up PB4 for Down LS1 for UP position MOTOR1 for UP motion CR4 as Contact Relay for UP button latching CR5 as Contact Relay for DOWN button latching
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
5
MasterLogic Programming Languages Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster
Procedures
Step
Action
1 ATTENTION Basics of the Ladder programming are provided in the Reference content. If needed, you can go through this objective to understand the basics of creating Ladder Logic
6
2
Open SoftMaster Application from StartAll ProgramsSoftMasterSoftMaster
3
Select Project New Project from Soft Master.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster
Step
Enter the Following information for the new project; Project Name
: Elevator Example
PLC Series
: ML-200 R
Program Name
: Ladder_Program
Program Language
: LD
5
4
Action
5
4/25/2012
Click OK.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
7
MasterLogic Programming Languages Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster
Step 6
8
Action Double-Click the I/O Parameter under the Project Window in SoftMaster.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster Step
Action
7
Close the Base00 drop-down menu and expand the Base 01 drop-down menu. In Base 01 add the following; Slot 0
: DC 24V INPUT ,8points
Slot 1
: RELAY OUTPUT ,8points
5
8
4/25/2012
Click OK.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
9
MasterLogic Programming Languages Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster
Step 9
Action Expand Scan Program Ladder_Program Local Variables in Project Tree Double-Click the Local Variables In the Local Variables area, enter the following:
10
11
10
Variable Kind
: VAR
Variable
: PB1
Type
: BOOL
Address
: %IX1.0.0
Comment
: START Button
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster
Step 12
Action Right-click in the blank parameters area and select Insert Line to add more variables.
Note: Press enter after each line to create new line for next variable
4/25/2012
Add three more variables with the following information; Variable Kind
: VAR
Variable
: LS2
Type
: BOOL
Address
: %IX1.0.1
Comment
: Down Position Limit Switch
Variable Kind
: VAR
Variable
: CR1
Type
: BOOL
Address
: %MX0
Comment
: START button Contact Relay
Variable Kind
: VAR
Variable
: MOTOR2
Type
: BOOL
Address
: %QX1.1.0
Comment
: DOWN Motion Motor Contactor
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
5
13
11
MasterLogic Programming Languages Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster
Step 14
15
12
Action Double-Click on the Program item under the Project Window to open the Ladder Diagram editor.
Select
button from the LD Toolbar.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster
Step 16
Action Select Row 0, Column 0 of the Ladder Diagram editor window.
5
ATTENTION The F3 or the Normally Open Contact cursor will follow the mouse pointer.
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
13
MasterLogic Programming Languages Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster
14
Step
Action
17
The Select Variable dialog box opens. Type Variable name as PB1. PB1 variable will be selected automatically from the list.
18
The Normally Open Contact is now associated to PB1.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster
Step 19
Select the button from the Ladder Diagram (LD) Toolbar. Click on Row 0, Column 2 of the Ladder Diagram editor window and associate the Normally Closed Contact (F4) to LS2 variable from the Select Variable dialog box.
Select the button from the Ladder Diagram (LD) Toolbar. Click on Row 0, Column 9 of the Ladder Diagram editor window and associate the Coil (F9) to CR1 variable from the Select Variable dialog box.
5
20
Action
21
22
4/25/2012
Select the button from the Ladder Diagram (LD) Toolbar. Click on Row 0, Column 1 of the Ladder Diagram editor window to connect PB1 to LS2, using the Horizontal Line (F5) rung connector.
Select the button from the Ladder Diagram (LD) Toolbar. Click on Row 1, Column 0 of the Ladder Diagram editor window and associate the Normally Open Contact (F3) to CR1 variable from the Select Variable dialog box.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
15
MasterLogic Programming Languages Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster
Step 23
16
Action Select the button from the Ladder Diagram (LD) Toolbar to create a parallel connection of CR1 to the PB1 using the Vertical Line (F6) rung connector.
24
Complete the second rung of the Ladder diagram to add a Coil (F9) associated to MOTOR2 variable from the Select Variable dialog box.
25
Save the program.
26
To simulate the Ladder logic created, start the ML200R simulator from Tools Start Simulator.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster
Step
Check all the items in the Write dialog box from the current project to be downloaded to the simulator.
5
27
Action
ATTENTION The Write Dialog box is displayed after a delay.
4/25/2012
28
Click OK.
29
View the Check Program tab on the Message Window. Correct errors, if any.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
17
MasterLogic Programming Languages Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster
Step 30
31
Action Select Tools Start Channel Monitoring from the SoftMaster-SM window.
In the SoftMaster window select the ML200R PLC Simulator to RUN mode.
button from the online toolbar to set the
32
Select Yes.
18
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster
Step
Double-click on the Input-Output devices from the simulator to view the status under the monitor mode.
5
33
Action
ATTENTION The Devices that were added as Digital Input and Digital Output have been represented as; B1S00 : DC 24V INPUT ,32points B1S01 : TR OUTPUT ,32points Where B#S## denoted Base # with Slot ##
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
19
MasterLogic Programming Languages Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster
Step 34
20
Action Double-click on the Channel Value of Channel No 1 from the Digital Input or B1S00.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster
Step 35
Action Set Channel Value to ON.
5
Re-Select Channel Value of Channel No 1 from the Digital Input or B1S00 to Reset Channel Value to OFF.
ATTENTION In an actual Process Condition the hardware Channel No 1 from B1S00 module will be Push button.
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
21
MasterLogic Programming Languages Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster
Step 36
Action In SoftMaster view that the Start switch latch logic is verified.
TIP CR1 variable is memory location %MX0, which can be viewed and RESET in Address Monitoring tool accessible in SoftMaster from Monitor Address Monitoring where status of M memory area should be viewed in 1-Bit (
37
22
) mode with HEX (
) notation.
Stop the Simulator by clicking on Tools Stop Simulator.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster Step 38
4/25/2012
Action Add the following to Local Variables for STOP sequence and Master Control; Variable Kind
: VAR
Variable
: PB2
Type
: BOOL
Address
: %IX1.0.2
Comment
: STOP Button
Variable Kind
: VAR
Variable
: CR2
Type
: BOOL
Address
: %MX1
Comment
: STOP button Contact Relay
Variable Kind
: VAR
Variable
: CR3
Type
: BOOL
Address
: %MX2
Comment
: Contact Relay for entire system Master control
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
5
23
MasterLogic Programming Languages Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster
Step
Action
39
Select Row 5, Column 0 of the Ladder Diagram editor window.
40
Create the STOP logic as shown in the screen capture.
ATTENTION Contact Relay CR3 will be utilized as the master control, which is the subsidiary action as a result of the STOP button or PB2 41
Save the Program. TIP The STOP Logic can be simulated in the simulator at this stage.
24
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster Step 42
4/25/2012
Action Add the following to Local Variables for Up Sequence; Variable Kind
: VAR
Variable
: PB3
Type
: BOOL
Address
: %IX1.0.3
Comment
: UP Button
Variable Kind
: VAR
Variable
: LS1
Type
: BOOL
Address
: %IX1.0.5
Comment
: Up Position Limit Switch
Variable Kind
: VAR
Variable
: MOTOR1
Type
: BOOL
Address
: %QX1.1.2
Comment
: UP Motion Motor Contactor
Variable Kind
: VAR
Variable
: CR4
Type
: BOOL
Address
: %MX3
Comment
: UP button Contact Relay
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
5
25
MasterLogic Programming Languages Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster
Step 43
Action Select Program from Project window to open Ladder_Program[Program] window. Create the UP Logic as shown in the screen capture.
44
Select Row 3, Column 4 of the Ladder Diagram editor window. Delete the Horizontal Line in this block.
45
Select the button from the Ladder Diagram (LD) Toolbar. Add the element to the Ladder Diagram editor window and associate the Normally Closed Contact (F4) to CR4 variable from the Select Variable dialog box.
ATTENTION CR4 will not allow the MOTOR2 action when MOTOR1 is ON
26
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster
Step
Add the following to Local Variables for Down Sequence; Variable Kind
: VAR
Variable
: PB4
Type
: BOOL
Address
: %IX1.0.4
Comment
: DOWN Button
Variable Kind
: VAR
Variable
: CR5
Type
: BOOL
Address
: %MX4
Comment
: DOWN button Contact Relay
5
46
Action
Select Ladder_Program[Program] tab 47
4/25/2012
Create the DOWN Logic as shown in the screen capture.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
27
MasterLogic Programming Languages Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster
Step 48
Action Select Row 4, Column 0 of the Ladder Diagram editor window, and create a parallel Normally Open (F3) contact to CR1. Associate the Normally Open Contact (F3) to CR5 Variable from the Select Variable dialog box
49
Select Row 12, Column 4 of the Ladder Diagram editor window. Delete the Horizontal Line in this block.
50
Select the button from the Ladder Diagram (LD) Toolbar. Add the element to the Ladder Diagram editor window and associate the Normally Closed Contact (F4) to CR5 variable from the Select Variable dialog box.
ATTENTION CR5 will commutate the MOTOR1 action when MOTOR2 is ON
51
Select Row 3, Column 7 of the Ladder Diagram editor window. Delete the Horizantal Line in this block.
28
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster
Step 52
Action Select the button from the Ladder Diagram (LD) Toolbar. Add the element to the Ladder Diagram editor window and associate the Normally Closed Contact (F4) to PB2 variable from the Select Variable dialog box.
Similarly, add Normally Closed Contact (F4) for PB2 at Row12 Column 7
54
Verify that the final control logic is as follows;
55
Save the program.
5
53
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
29
MasterLogic Programming Languages Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster
Step 56
Action Add the Input and Output Variables to be monitored in the Variable Monitor inside SoftMaster.
TIP The variable name needs to be manually typeD in the Variable Name/Address field.
57
30
Add all Input-Output variables to Monitor 1 window as shown in the screen capture below.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster
Step
Action
58
Add all Contact Relay variables to the Monitor 2 window as shown in the screencapture below.
59
To simulate the Ladder Logic created, start the ML200R simulator from Tools Start Simulator, from SoftMaster. Click OK on the Write window. Click OK on SoftMaster window. View the Check Program tab in SoftMaster on the Message Window. Correct errors, if any.
61
Select Tools Start Channel Monitoring from the SoftMaster-SM window.
62
5
60
In the SoftMaster window, select the ML200R PLC Simulator to RUN mode.
button from the online toolbar to set the
Click Yes on SoftMaster window. 63
Monitor the Input-Output variables.
ATTENTION The Input / Output should be Set / Reset from the Channel Monitoring in ML200R Simulator. The Monitoring is view-only.
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
31
MasterLogic Programming Languages Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster
Step
Action
64
Monitor the Contact Relay variables.
65
In the Simulator, simulate the Elevator Ladder Program in the MasterLogic. Verify that the following expected results are obtained; Start
Stop
Up
Down
LS1
LS2
MOTOR1
MOTOR2
TRUE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
OFF
ON
FALSE
TRUE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
OFF
OFF
FALSE
FALSE
TRUE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
ON
OFF
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
TRUE
FALSE
FALSE
OFF
ON
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
TRUE
FALSE
OFF
OFF
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
TRUE
OFF
OFF
ATTENTION The button(s) are Push to ON type, which need to be reset manually. LS1 and LS2 need to be OFF normally, which is to be done manually.
32
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create and Implement Analog Control Logic Using SoftMaster
Create and Implement Analog Control Logic Using SoftMaster Practice Objective The objective of this LAB is to create and simulate analog control logic in the ML200R PLC.
5
Process Description:
Create control logic with a Ladder diagram for the example shown above. Analog Input current from a water level sensor (4~20mA) comes into the ML200R. PID Control Logic is executed in the ML200R and the PID produces an Analog Output Voltage (4~20mA). This analog output is used to control the water level in the tank
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
33
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create and Implement Analog Control Logic Using SoftMaster
Detailed Instructions
34
Step
Action
1
Open SoftMaster from Start All Programs SoftMaster SoftMaster.
2
Select Project New Project from SoftMaster.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create and Implement Analog Control Logic Using SoftMaster
Step 3
Action Enter the Following information for the new project. Project Name: PID Loop Example PLC Series: ML-200 R Program Name: Ladder_Program
5
Program Language: LD
4
4/25/2012
Click OK when finished.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
35
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create and Implement Analog Control Logic Using SoftMaster
Step
Action
5
Double-click I/O Parameter under the Project Window in SoftMaster.
6
Close the Base00 drop-down menu and open the Base 01 drop-down menu. In Base 01 add the following: Slot 2: 2MLF-AC8A(Current, 8-CH) Slot 3: 2MLF-DC8A(Current, 8-CH)
7
36
Select 2MLF-AC8A(Current, 8-CH) and click on Details button.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create and Implement Analog Control Logic Using SoftMaster
Step 8
Action In the 2MLF-AC8A(Current, 8-CH) dialog box, select the following for CH0: Channel status: Enable Input Range: 4~20mA
5
Output type: 0~16000
9
Click OK.
10
Select 2MLF-DC8A (Current, 8-CH) and click on Details button.
11
In the 2MLF-DC8A(Current, 8-CH) dialog box, select the following for CH0: Select Channel status: Enable Output Range: 4~20mA Input type: 0~16000 CH. Output type: Min value
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
37
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create and Implement Analog Control Logic Using SoftMaster
38
Step
Action
12
Click OK.
13
In the I/O Parameter Settings dialog box, click OK.
14
In response to the SoftMaster dialog box, click Yes.
15
In the Register Special Modules Variables Window, select all the modules and click OK
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create and Implement Analog Control Logic Using SoftMaster Step
4/25/2012
Action
16
Double-Click Local Variables under the Project Window in SoftMaster.
17
In the Local Variables dialog box, define the following variables:
5
Variable Kind
Variable
Type
Address
VAR_External
_0102_CH0_DATA
INT
%UW1.2.3
VAR_External
_0103_CH0_DATA
INT
%UW1.3.3
VAR
StartPID
BOOL
%MX10
VAR
Block
UINT
%MW10
VAR
Loop
UINT
%MW11
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
39
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create and Implement Analog Control Logic Using SoftMaster
Step 18
19
Action Double-click on Program in the Project Window to open the Ladder Diagram editor.
Select the
button from the LD Toolbar and click in the Program window.
TIP The F10 or the Function/FB cursor will follow the mouse pointer.
40
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create and Implement Analog Control Logic Using SoftMaster
Step
The Function/Function Block dialog box opens. •
Select Function/Function Block
•
Enter the Name: MOVE
5
20
Action
21
4/25/2012
Click on Search.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
41
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create and Implement Analog Control Logic Using SoftMaster
Step
Action
22
Click OK.
23
In the Program editor window, connect the EN pin with the horizontal line F5.
24
Press ESC(escape) key Double-click next to the IN parameter in the MOVE function.
25
In the Select Variable window, enter/select the following: Variable: _0102_CH0_DATA Variable List: Local Variable
42
26
Click OK.
27
Double-click on the OUT parameter in the MOVE function.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create and Implement Analog Control Logic Using SoftMaster
Step 28
Action In the Select Variable window, enter/select the following: Variable List: Flag List: PID Deselect the Flag View checkbox All.
Select _PID0_00PV from the variable list. This is the PV parameter of a PID block.
5
29
ATTENTION Variable names include block no. and loop no. So depending upon block and loop no. appropriate variable is required to be selected
30
4/25/2012
Click OK.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
43
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create and Implement Analog Control Logic Using SoftMaster
44
Step
Action
31
Insert the Function Block PIDRUN
32
In the Select Variable Window, select the Local Variable and type a unique Instance/ Variable Name and click OK
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create and Implement Analog Control Logic Using SoftMaster Step
Action
33
In the Variable Name Add window, click OK
34
Set the variables listed below:
5
REQ: Start PID ( Add Normally Open Contact from toolbar for StartPID ) Block: Block Loop: Loop 35
Insert the second Function Block MOVE and set the variables listed below: EN: connect directly with Horizontal Line F5 IN: _PID0_00MV (_PID0_00MV is accessible using the same steps mentioned in step 28 and 29) OUT: 0103_CH0_DATA
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
45
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create and Implement Analog Control Logic Using SoftMaster
46
Step
Action
36
In the Program window, your final program will be similar to the one shown below.
37
In the SoftMaster window, select Online Connection Settings.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create and Implement Analog Control Logic Using SoftMaster
Step 38
Action Make sure that connection Type is set to USB
5
Click Connect
39
Select Online Write Click OK in Write dialog box
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
47
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create and Implement Analog Control Logic Using SoftMaster
48
Step
Action
40
Click Yes
41
Click OK
42
Change the PLC Mode to Run.
43
In the SoftMaster window, select Monitor PID Monitoring.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create and Implement Analog Control Logic Using SoftMaster Step
Action
44
In the Block Information window from PID Monitoring, select the checkbox for LOOP00 in BLOCK00 and double click it.
45
In the LOOP0_00 dialog box, set the PID parameters in Setting View as shown in the next step.
5
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
49
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create and Implement Analog Control Logic Using SoftMaster
Step 46
Action In the LOOP0_00 dialog box, set the PID parameters in the Setting View shown below: SV: 8000 Max. MV: 16000 Min. MV: 0 AT_HYS_val: 100 AT_SV: 4000 _PID0_00K_p: 2 _PID0_00T_i: 2.2 _PID0_00T_d: 0.5
ATTENTION The PV value is taken from the Analog Input module which has a selected range of 4~20mA. The output type defined for the Analog Input module is 0~16000. Set Value (SV) is a scaled based on the output type defined. Example: If the SV is 8000, then it is equivalent to 12mA.
47
In Softmaster click Monitor Start Monitoring In the Program window, turn on the StartPID bit for the PIDRUN block
50
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create and Implement Analog Control Logic Using SoftMaster
Step 48
Action Change the PID PV value to 6020 by changing current input to CH0 of AI module
ATTENTION Use Analog Input potentiometer on ML200R kit to change the value PV = 6020 is equivalent to 10mA. Set the AI potentiometer to 10mA.
In the LOOP0_00 window, monitor the trend for the PID parameters PV, SV, and MV.
5
49
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
51
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create and Implement Analog Control Logic Using SoftMaster
Step 50
Action In Softmaster select Monitor Address Monitoring Set %UX1.3.32 to 1 This will enable the output at CH0 of AO module. You can observe the respective current value in Analog Output display on your kit.
51
Change the PID PV value to 11020 by changing current input to CH0 of AI module. PV=11020 is equivalent to 15mA
52
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create Program Using ST
Create Program Using ST Practice Objective The objective of this lab is to create a program using Structured Text (ST) language in the ML200R PLC. Prerequisites SoftMaster is installed and configured. Introduction In this lab, you will perform the following: Write a simple program using Structured Text (ST) Language
•
Load and monitor the program using SoftMaster Simulator 5
•
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
53
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create Program Using ST
Procedures
Step
Action
1
Open SoftMaster from Start All Programs SoftMaster SoftMaster.
2
From the Project menu in SoftMaster, select Open from PLC…
TIP Open from PLC will upload the project information from the PLC along with the hardware details. Open Project will open a previously configured project in the offline mode. New Project will create a new project in the offline mode.
54
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create Program Using ST
Step
In the Online Connection Settings, select USB as the connection type, and click Connect.
5
3
Action
ATTENTION Connection Type can be USB, Extended base USB or RS-232C with depth Local. If the Connection Type selected is RS-232C, then click the Settings tab and select the COM Port used and enter the Baud Rate. Ethernet Connections cannot be used because the FEnet Module is not yet configured.
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
55
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create Program Using ST
Step 4
Action In response to the SoftMaster information dialog box, click OK.
TIP If the connection is successfully established, the above dialog box appears. If the connection is unsuccessful, then an error dialog box will appear stating “Cannot use USB port. Check the connection state and try again.” If you get an error message, verify the connection setting and cable connections and retry.
5
56
In the Project Window of SoftMaster, double click on I/O Parameters.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create Program Using ST Step
Action
6
Check the I/O modules in the I/O Parameter Setting window.
7
Click OK.
8
Disconnect from the PLC by clicking Disconnect from the Online Menu.
9
In the Project Window select and Right-click on Scan Program.
5
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
57
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create Program Using ST
Step
Action
10
Select Add Item Program…
11
Enter the Program name: STProgram Select ST for the Language and click OK
ATTENTION Do not use special characters in Program name.
58
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create Program Using ST Step
Action
12
In the Project Window, expand ST Program and double click on Local Variables.
13
In the Local Variables window, define the following variables: •
•
•
14
4/25/2012
Variable Kind
: VAR
Variable
: Motor
Type
: BOOL
Address
: %QX1.1.10
Variable Kind
: VAR
Variable
: Start
Type
: BOOL
Address
: %IX1.0.10
Variable Kind
: VAR
Variable
: Stop1
Type
: BOOL
Address
: %IX1.0.11
5
In the Project Window, expand ST Program and double-click on Program.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
59
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create Program Using ST
Step 15
Action In the ST Program Window, write a simple ST Start/Stop sequence program as shown: Motor:= (Start OR Motor) AND NOT Stop1;
ATTENTION Refer to the Start/ Stop sequence in the Ladder program from the lab “Configure ML200R using SoftMaster”.
16
In the SoftMaster Window, select View Check Program…
17
Click OK on Program Check – New PLC window.
18
Monitor the Check Program tab in the Message Window.
19
In the SoftMaster Window, select Tools Start Simulator
20
Click OK on Write window. Click OK on SoftMaster window.
60
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create Program Using ST
Step 21 22
Action Set the PLC mode to Run In Simulator window, select Start Monitoring
tool.
Change the value of channel 10 of 2MLI-DC4A module to ON
Observe that Start variable is set to 1 In the Monitoring Window, observe the value of the Motor variable.
24
Change the value of channel 11 of 2MLI-DC4A module to ON
5
23
Observe that Stop1 variable is set to 1 25
4/25/2012
In the Monitoring Window, note the value of the Motor variable.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
61
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create Program Using ST
This page was intentionally left blank.
62
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create Program Using SFC
Create Program Using SFC Practice Objective The objective of this lab is to create a program using Sequential Function Chart (SFC) Language for the ML200R PLC. Prerequisites SoftMaster (MasterLogic Programming software) is installed. Introduction In this lab, you will perform the following: • Create a simple program using SFC
5
• Execute the program using the SoftMaster Simulator
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
63
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create Program Using SFC
Procedures
Step
Action
1
Open SoftMaster from Start All Programs SoftMaster SoftMaster.
2
Select Project New Project from SoftMaster.
TIP Open from PLC will upload the project information from the PLC along with the hardware details. Open Project will open a previously configured project in the offline mode. New Project will create a new project in the offline mode.
64
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create Program Using SFC
Step 3
Action Enter the following information for the new project: Project Name: Test1 PLC Series: ML-200 R Program Name: SFCProgram
5
Program Language: SFC
4
4/25/2012
Click OK.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
65
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create Program Using SFC
Step 5
66
Action Expand the Test1 project and double click on Local Variables.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create Program Using SFC
Step
In the Local Variables window, define the variables shown below: Variable Kind
Variable
Type
VAR
a1
SINT
VAR
b
SINT
VAR
Complete
BOOL
VAR
GOTO_INIT
BOOL
VAR
ts1
BOOL
VAR
ts2
BOOL
VAR
ts2_1
BOOL
VAR
Ts3
BOOL
VAR
Ts4
BOOL
VAR
Ts5
BOOL
5
6
Action
TIP GOTO_INIT will be present by default and there may not be any need to create it separately
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
67
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create Program Using SFC
Step
Action
7
Double-click on Program in the Project Window.
8
In the SFC Toolbar, select F3 and click in the Program window.
TIP The F3 or the Step cursor will follow the mouse pointer.
9
68
In the Program Editor window, the initial Step S0 appears.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create Program Using SFC
Step
Action
10
Double-click on Transition in the Program Editor window.
11
In the Transition Properties window, enter the following: Name: ts1 Comment: If ts1 is true the program will move to the next step
12
Click OK.
13
Insert a new step S1 below step S0 in the Program window using F3.
14
Insert a new step S2 below step S1 in the Program window using F3.
15
Select F8
5
Type: Variable
(Left Branch) and click on step S1.
TIP The F8 or the Left Branch cursor will follow the mouse pointer.
4/25/2012
16
In the Program Editor window, two circles will appear around S1 and the transition.
17
Click on the circle in the Transition area.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
69
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create Program Using SFC
Step
Action
18
In the Program Editor window, a Selection Branch will appear between S1 and S2 as shown below.
19
Click on the Transition between steps S1 and S2.
20
In the Transition properties window, enter the following: Name: ts2 Comment: If ts2 is true, the program will move to the next step. Type: Variable Click OK.
21 Select F7
(Jump) and click on the Transition parallel to ts2.
Click here
TIP The F7 or the Jump cursor will follow the mouse pointer.
70
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create Program Using SFC Step
Action
22
In the Jump Properties window, type cc1. Click OK.
23
Click on the transition parallel to ts2.
24
In the Transition Properties window, enter the following:
5
Name: ts2_1 Comment: If ts2_1 is true, program will jump to label cc1. Type: Variable Click OK. 25
Add a transition Ts3 after step S2.
26
In the Transition Properties window, enter the following: Name: Ts3 Comment: If Ts3 is true, program will execute next step. Type: Variable Click OK.
27 28
4/25/2012
Add steps S3 and S4 after step S2. Select F8
(Left Branch) and click on transition ts3 (between steps S2 and S3).
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
71
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create Program Using SFC
Step
Action
29
In the Program Editor window, two circles appear on S3 and the transition before it.
30
Click on step S3.
31
In the Program Editor window, a Parallel Branch appears as shown below.
32
Select F4
(Action) and click on step S5. TIP The F4 or the Action cursor will follow the mouse pointer
33
In the Action Properties window, enter the Name: Program1 Select Type: Program
72
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create Program Using SFC
Step
Action
34
Click OK.
35
In the Add Program window, select Language LD.
36
Click OK.
37
Right-click Program1 and select Open Program
5
In the Program Editor window, write an LD Program for Program1 as shown below.
ATTENTION The variables used in the program (a1, b, Complete and so on) were already defined in step 6 Note that the EN pin of ADD block is connected to a Positive Transition input. Select Shift+F1 to insert Positive Transition sensing contact. Associate it with flag _T1S The procedure to create a Ladder diagram was explained in Implement Discrete Control Logic using SoftMaster lab.
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
73
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create Program Using SFC
Step
Action
38
Double-click on the Transition between step S3 and S4.
39
In the Transition Properties window, enter the following: Name: ts4 Comment: If Ts4 is true, program will move to next step. Type: Variable Click OK.
40
Select F6
(Label) and click on S4.
TIP The F6 or the Label cursor will follow the mouse pointer. 41
In the Label Properties window, type cc1.
42
Click OK.
43
Double-click on the Transition after step S4.
44
In Transition Properties window, enter the following: Name: Ts5 Comment: If ts5 is true, program will move to next step. Type: Variable Click OK.
74
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create Program Using SFC Step
Action
45
The final program, in the Program Editor window the following will appear.
46
In the SoftMaster Window, select View Check Program…
5
Click OK on Program Check window 47
4/25/2012
In the Check Program tab’s Message Window, ensure there are no errors.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
75
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create Program Using SFC
Step 48
Action In the SoftMaster window, select Tools Start Simulator. Click OK on Write window. Click OK on SoftMaster window.
76
49
Change the PLC Mode to Run.
50
In the Program Editor window, observe that Step S0 is being executed.
51
Double-click on transition ts1.
52
In the Change Current Value dialog box, select On for Set Value and click OK.
53
Step S1 will start executing since ts1 is true.
54
Monitor the program and simulate the other transitions.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create User Defined Function / Function Blocks
Create User Defined Function / Function Blocks Practice Objective The objective of this lab is to create a User Defined Function Block using Ladder Diagram (LD) language for the ML200R PLC. Prerequisites SoftMaster is installed and configured Introduction
•
Create a User defined function block
•
Implement the function block in the main program
•
Load and Monitor using the SoftMaster Simulator
•
Import a pre-configured Control Module which has PIDA block
•
Load and observe its performance after changing the set point
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
5
In this lab, you will perform the following:
77
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create User Defined Function / Function Blocks
Procedures
Step
Action
Create User Defined Function Block. 1
78
Open SoftMaster from Start All Programs SoftMaster SoftMaster.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create User Defined Function / Function Blocks
Step 2
Action From the Project Menu in SoftMaster select “Open from PLC…”
TIP
5
Open from PLC will upload the project information from the PLC along with the hardware details. Open Project will open a previously configured project in the offline mode. New Project will create a new project in the offline mode.
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
79
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create User Defined Function / Function Blocks
Step 3
Action In Online Settings, select USB as the connection type, and click Connect.
ATTENTION Connection type can be USB, Extended base USB or RS-232C with depth Local. If the connection type selected is RS-232C, then click the Settings tab and select the COM Port used and enter the baud rate. Ethernet Connection cannot be used because FEnet Module is not yet configured.
80
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create User Defined Function / Function Blocks
Step 4
Action In response to the SoftMaster information dialog box, click OK.
TIP If the connection is successfully established, the above dialog box appears. If the connection is unsuccessful, then an error dialog box will appear stating “Cannot use USB port. Check the connection state and try again”.
5
4/25/2012
5
If you get an error message, verify the connection setting and cable connections and retry.
In the Project Window of SoftMaster, double-click on I/O Parameters.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
81
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create User Defined Function / Function Blocks
Step
Action
6
Check the I/O modules in the I/O Parameter Setting window.
7
Click OK.
8 ATTENTION To configure items under Scan Program, first disconnect from the PLC by clicking Online Disconnect In Project Window select and Right-click on User Function/Function Block.
82
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create User Defined Function / Function Blocks
Step
Action
9
Select Add Item Function Block…
10
In the User Function/Function Block window: Type the Program name: TwooutofThree Select Language: LD
5
Select the check box: Use EN/ENO
11 4/25/2012
Click OK Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
83
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create User Defined Function / Function Blocks
84
Step
Action
12
In Project Window, expand TwooutofThree and double-click on Local Variables.
13
In the Local Variables window enter the following: Variable Kind
Variable
Type
VAR_INPUT
Input1
BOOL
VAR_INPUT
Input2
BOOL
VAR_INPUT
Input3
BOOL
VAR
Out1
BOOL
VAR
Out2
BOOL
VAR
Out3
BOOL
VAR_OUTPUT
Output1
BOOL
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create User Defined Function / Function Blocks
Step
Action
14
In Project Window, expand TwooutofThree and double-click on Program.
15
Select F10 from the LD Toolbar and click on the Program window.
16
We will now insert a function in the Program Window.
TIP
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
5
Using [F10] in the Program Window will open a function block library.
85
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create User Defined Function / Function Blocks
Step 17
Action In the Function/Function Block dialog box enter the following: Name: AND Select the List option: Function/Function Block Click the Search button.
18
In the Function Information section of the dialog box, enter the number of inputs as 2.
19
Click OK.
20
Repeat steps 15 to 19 and add two more AND functions and one OR function from the function library ATTENTION For the OR function, enter the No. of Inputs as 3 in Step 18.
86
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create User Defined Function / Function Blocks Step
Action
21
In the Program Window, connect the EN pin directly with a horizontal line.
22
In the AND function block, double-click on IN1.
23
In the Select Variable window select Local Variable from the Variable List and enter Input1 as the Variable.
24
Click OK.
5
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
87
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create User Defined Function / Function Blocks
Step 25
Action Repeat steps 22 to 24 for adding variables to IN2 and OUT.
ATTENTION For IN2 add Input2 as the variable in the AND Function. For OUT add Out1 as the variable in the AND Function. 26
Select the following: For the second AND function add: IN1
: Input2
IN2
: Input3
OUT
: Out2
For the third AND function add:
27
88
IN1
: Input1
IN2
: Input3
OUT
: Out3
For the OR function select the following: IN1
: Out1
IN2
: Out2
IN3
: Out3
OUT
: Output1
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create User Defined Function / Function Blocks Step
Action
28
The logic for your Function Block TwooutofThree is illustrated below.
29
In the SoftMaster Window select View Check Program…
30
In the Check Range section of the Program Check window, select Current program (TwooutofThree).
5
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
89
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create User Defined Function / Function Blocks
Step
Action
31
Click OK.
32
Monitor the Check Program tab in the Message Window.
User Defined Function Block in Scan Program.
90
33
In the Project Window select and right-click on Scan Program.
34
Select Add Item Program…
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create User Defined Function / Function Blocks
Step 35
Action In the Program Window type: Program name: Test1 Select Language: LD
Click OK.
37
In Project Window, expand Test1 and double-click on Local Variables.
38
In the Local Variables window, define the following variables:
39
4/25/2012
5
36
Variable Kind
Variable
Type
Address
VAR
A
BOOL
%IX1.0.0
VAR
B
BOOL
%IX1.0.1
VAR
C
BOOL
%IX1.0.2
VAR
D
BOOL
%QX1.1.0
In the Project Window, expand Test1 and double-click on Program.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
91
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create User Defined Function / Function Blocks
92
Step
Action
40
In the Program Window click on F10 from the LD toolbar.
41
In the Function/Function Block window, select Function Block and enter the Name TwooutofThree.
42
Click Search and click OK
43
In Select Variable Dialog Box, select Local Variable and Click OK
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create User Defined Function / Function Blocks Step
Action
44
In Variable Name/Add Dialog Box click OK
45
Connect the input and output variables defined in Local Variables to the function block.
46
In the SoftMaster Window select View Check Program…
47
In the Program Check window select Current program (Test1) in Check Range and click OK.
5
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
93
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create User Defined Function / Function Blocks
Step
Action
48
Monitor the Check Program tab in the Message Window.
49
In the SoftMaster window, select Tools Start Simulator. Click OK on Write window. Click OK on SoftMaster window.
94
50
Change the Mode of the PLC to Run.
51
In the Program Window, double-click on A.
52
In the Change Current Value dialog box, select On for Value.
53
Click OK.
54
Verify the values of variable D. A
B
C
D
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create User Defined Data Types
Create User Defined Data Types Practice Objective •
The objective of this LAB is to configure and demonstrate the use of User Data Type in the ML200R PLC program
Prerequisites SoftMaster (MasterLogic Programming software) is installed
5
•
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
95
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create User Defined Data Types
Procedures
Step
Action
Configure User Data Type in the Project. 1
Open SoftMaster Application from StartAll ProgramsSoftMasterSoftMaster
2
Select ProjectNew Project from Soft Master menu bar
3
Enter the following information for in the New Project dialog box Project Name
UD DATA TYPE
Leave other settings to default and click OK
96
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create User Defined Data Types
Step
Action
4
In Project Tab, right-click on User Data Type and select Add Item Data Type
5
In the User Data Type dialog box, enter the following: Name: POINT Comment: X/Y AXIS
5
Click OK
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
97
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create User Defined Data Types
Step 6
7
98
Action In the POINT window, enter the following: Variable
Type
Comment
X
INT
X Axis Point
Y
INT
Y Axis Point
Double-click on Local Variables in the project window
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create User Defined Data Types
Step 8
Action Enter the following: Variable Kind: VAR Variable: ORIGIN Select STRUCT as Type and press enter
5
In the User-defined Data Type Select dialog box, select POINT and click OK
9
4/25/2012
Double-click on Program in the Project window
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
99
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create User Defined Data Types
Step 10
In LD Toolbar, select sF1 (
) and click on the Program Window
11
In the Select Variable dialog box, enter A for Variable and click OK
12
Click OK in the Variable Name Add dialog box
13
100
Action
In LD Toolbar, select F10 (
) and click on Row 0, Column 1 of program window
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create User Defined Data Types
Step 14
Action In the Function / Function Block dialog box, select the following: List: Function In Function List, select ADD
5
Click OK and press ESC
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
101
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create User Defined Data Types
Step
Action
15
Double-click on IN1 pin in ADD function
16
In the Select Variable dialog box, enter the Variable as ORIGINX and click OK In the Variable Name Add dialog box, click OK
102
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create User Defined Data Types
Step 17
Action Double-click on OUT pin of the ADD function In the Select variable dialog box, enter Variable as ORIGINX Click OK on Select Variable dialog box
18
Repeat steps 13 to 17 to add another ADD function
ATTENTION In Step 13, select Row 0, Column 5 In Step 16, enter Variable as ORIGINY In Step 17, enter Variable as ORIGINY 19
Connect EN0 pin of the first ADD function with the EN pin of the second ADD function )
5
using F5 (
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
103
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create User Defined Data Types
Step 20
Action Double-click IN2 Pin of the first ADD function In the Select Variable dialog box, enter the variable as 100 and click OK
21
Double-click on the IN2 Pin of the second ADD function and enter the Variable as 10 Click OK in the Select Variable dialog box
104
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create User Defined Data Types
Step 22
Action Double-click on Rung where the function is added In the Comment/Label dialog box, select Comment, if not selected Click OK in the Comment/Label dialog box
5
Double-click here
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
105
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create User Defined Data Types
Step
Action
23
Enter the comment as Move X Axis(100), Y Axis(10) and click OK
24
Select Tools Start Simulator in Menu bar
25
In the Write dialog box, click OK
ATTENTION It takes some time for the simulator to start and the Write dialog box to appear
106
26
Click OK in the Writing completed dialog box
27
Select Online Change Mode Run to run the simulator
28
Click Yes in the SoftMaster dialog box
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create User Defined Data Types
Step 29
Action Double-click on variable A
5
Ensure that ON is selected as the Set value and click OK
30
4/25/2012
Verify whether the value 100 and 10 are written to ORIGINX and ORIGINY parameter respectively
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
107
MasterLogic Programming Languages Create User Defined Data Types
This page was intentionally left blank.
108
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
Describe Network Manager within SoftMaster
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
1
Describe Network Manager within SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
• Soft Master Network Manager (SoftMaster-NM) is a software tool available in Soft Master – Softmaster-NM is used to set up Communication Modules such a FEnet, Snet, Device Net, and Profibus-DP(P-Net)
• SoftMaster-NM Functions – – – – – – –
Configure Communication Modules (Standard Settings) Manage and Diagnose Communication Modules Configure High Speed Link (HSL) Settings Configure Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Settings Read Communication Settings from ML200R Write Communication Settings to ML200R Upload Communication Settings from SYCON
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
2
1
Describe Network Manager within SoftMaster 2/2/2012
6
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Honeywell
SoftMaster-NM Online Toolbar
Design Window
Project Window
Communication Status with ML200R PLC Message Window
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
3
Describe Network Manager within SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Online Functionality - Toolbar
Reset Individual Module Connect/Disconnect from PLC
System Diagnostics Read I/O Information from PLC
Connection Settings to connect to PLC
Enable Link to start Communication with PLC (HS Link, P2P)
Write Parameter Settings to PLC (Standard Settings, HS Link, P2P)
Delete Parameter from PLC (Standard Settings, HS Link, P2P)
Read Parameter Settings from PLC (Standard Settings, HS Link, P2P)
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4
2
Describe Network Manager within SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Open SoftMaster-NM • Open Soft Master – Select Tools Network Manager to open SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
5
Describe Network Manager within SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Create a New Project • In SoftMaster-NM, select File New Project
Enter a Project Name and File Location Select the PLC Type
Select the CPU Type
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
6
3
Describe Network Manager within SoftMaster 2/2/2012
6
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Honeywell
Read I/O Information
• Connect to the PLC and then Read the I/O Information to retrieve the I/O Module information from the PLC Connect and Read from PLC
No Modules are Associated with the Base
FEnet Module Connected to Base 0, Slot 0
Snet Module Connected to Base 1, Slot 4
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
7
Describe Network Manager within SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Communication Support •
Standard Settings Tab
•
High-speed Link Tab
•
P2P Tab
– Configure Communication Modules such as FEnet, Snet etc. – Configure High-speed Link for Communication Modules – Configure Peer-to-Peer parameters for Communication Modules
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
8
4
Describe Network Manager within SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Communication Settings
• SoftMaster-NM supports configuration of the following communication modules: Double-click to open the FEnet Standard Settings window
– FEnet - Fast Ethernet Communication – Snet - Serial Bus Communication – Pnet - Prefabs Communication – Dnet - Device Net Communication
FEnet Module Settings
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
9
Describe Network Manager within SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
This page intentionally left blank
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
10
5
Describe Network Manager within SoftMaster 2/2/2012
6
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Describe FENet Configuration
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
11
Describe FENet Configuration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Introduction •
Fast Ethernet (FEnet) is an industrial use High-speed Ethernet Communication Module with 10/100Mbps support
•
FEnet Types – 2MLL-EFMT • 10/100Base-TX • Media UTP/STP-CAT5 – 2MLL-EFMF • 100Base-FX (fiber-optic) • Media x62.5/125um, Multi-mode
•
High reliability and performance with an In-built 32-bit Processor
•
Connectivity to HMI S/W (e.g. Experion PKS)
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
2MLL-EFMT
2MLL-EFMF
UTP/STP Media
Fiber-optic Media
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
12
6
Describe FENet Configuration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Overview • FEnet Supports – Peer-to-Peer Integration with Peer MasterLogic PLCs – Experion Integration via MasterLogic Dedicated Protocol (MLDP) – MODBUS TCP/IP Master / Slave Protocol – Connectivity to SoftMaster – User-defined Protocol for interface with the third-party Devices
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
13
Describe FENet Configuration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Installation and Wiring • 2MLL-EFMT Installation – Max . segment length of 10/100BASE-TX is 100m (between this module and the hub) – Generally a straight cable is used (twisted with TD and RD inside) – If only 2 communication modules are connected 1 to 1, the cross cable type is applied
2MLL-EFMT Installation MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
14
7
Describe FENet Configuration 2/2/2012
6
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Honeywell
Installation and Wiring • 2MLL-EFMF installation – 100BASE-FX must be used with 2 cored multimode 62.5/123 cable (SC connector) – Can be accessed by optic switching hubs and optic converters – Maximum extended length between nodes can be 2 Km – Refer to the user manual for detailed information
2MLL-EFMF Installation Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
15
Describe FENet Configuration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
FEnet Sample Application
• Architecture of 100BASE-TX or FX Network of MasterLogic PLC – SoftMaster Communicates with PLC[1] on a local USB or RS-232C – SoftMaster Communicates (for programming) with other PLCs through Ethernet Network – Peer-to-Peer Communication among PLCs SoftMaster Node PLC [1] IP:210.206.91.188
PLC [2] IP:210.206.91.189
PLC [n] IP:210.206.91.190
`
USB or RS-232C Ethernet Network
Local Connection MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Logical Connection via Ethernet Communication Module (remote) Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
16
8
Describe FENet Configuration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
•
Open SoftMaster NM – Select File Open from PLC
•
In Online Settings, select type “USB”
•
Click Connect
•
For RS-232C Connections – Click the Settings button • Configure COM Port selection • Configure Baud rate
•
An Ethernet connection cannot be used because the FEnet Module is not configured
•
On successful connection, the following message is displayed – “Reading is completed”
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
17
Describe FENet Configuration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
FEnet Configuration
• If the connection is not successful, the following error message is displayed –
“Cannot use USB port. Check the connection state and try again.”
• In the event of an error message: – Verify connection settings – Verify cable connections – Retry connecting
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
18
9
Describe FENet Configuration 2/2/2012
6
FEnet Configuration
Honeywell
Network Manager – SoftMaster-NM •
Select the Tools menu in SoftMaster – Select ‘Network Manager’
–
Network Manager (SoftMaster-NM) is a separate tool within SoftMaster – Used for configuration of communication-related information
1
–
2
Select the File menu in SoftMasterNM – Select ‘Open from PLC’ – Click ‘OK’ to save Network Manager settings – Wait for reading parameters process to complete
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
3
4
5
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
19
FEnet Configuration in SoftMaster - NM
Describe FENet Configuration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
• In SoftMaster-NM – Double-click to open the FEnet Module from the Project Window
• Applicable FEnet Parameters – One IP Solution – TCP/IP Settings HS Link Station No. is required to be specified. Range 0-63
– Reception Waiting Time – Number of Dedicated Connections – Driver (Server) Settings – Host Table Settings MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
20
10
Describe FENet Configuration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
TCP/IP Configuration Options •
One IP Solution • Enable One IP Solution Configuration option for FENet Module
•
A-Side and B-Side Tabs – These tabs are available for configuration only when One IP Solution check box option is not selected – These tabs are used to Configure FENet module’s TCP/IP settings seperately present in Master Logic CPU redundant system
•
One IP Tab – This tab is available for configuration, only when One IP Solution check box option is selected – Used to configure single IP for the FENet Modules present in redundant CPU – One IP Solution is mainly used to integrate ML System with 3rd Party SCADA Systems which support only one IP SCADA communication • Since Experion PKS supports redundancy for SCADA Communication, this setting is not used while integrating ML System with Experion PKS
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
21
Honeywell
TCP/IP Settings •
One IP Solution
•
HS Link Station No
•
Media
•
IP Address
•
Subnet Mask
•
Gateway
•
DNS Server
•
DHCP
•
Copy AB or Copy BA
Describe FENet Configuration 2/2/2012
• Enable One IP Solution Configuration option for FENet Module. • Unique number for HS Link Communication between ML200R PLC’s FEnet I/F Modules • Range 0-63 • Selection of the Physical Media Type • Internet Protocol (IP) Address • IP Mask to verify if destination station is on the same network • IP Address of the Gateway or Router to transmit/receive data through a public network or a different network • IP Address of a domain name server • Used if the IP Address is not fixed but assigned as a Dynamic IP – Dynamic IP is used for ADSL Communication • Copy Settings for Redundant FEnet partner. This option is available only if One IP Solution option is disabled.
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
22
11
Describe FENet Configuration 2/2/2012
6
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Honeywell
FEnet Settings…Continued •
Reception Waiting Time – Specified time for end of dedicated communication from host PC or MMI regardless of normal ending procedures • Time is used in a dedicated service to reset the channel for errors occurred on a destination station or for cable disconnection errors
•
No of Dedicated Connections – Maximum number of TCP dedicated services (1–16) accessible at a time • Maximum number of dedicated connections from host PC or MMI
•
Driver (Server) Settings – Selection of Server drivers
•
Host table Settings – Setting to enable network communication only with client addresses registered in the host table – Range 1-16
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
23
Describe FENet Configuration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
One IP Solution Configuration • Steps to enable and configure One IP Solution for FENet Module – Open Softmaster-NM in softmaster • Tools Network Manager – Double click on FENet Module – Select the One IP Solution check box option to enable One IP Solution Configuration. – Enter TCP/IP setting details – This IP must be an even number
• To use one IP you must select automatic switchover for FEnet modules in Redundancy Parameter Settings
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
24
12
Describe FENet Configuration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
System Configuration Precautions • IP Addresses are unique for all FEnet Modules
– In the event of repeated addresses, a transmission error may result leading to incorrect communication.
• Unique HS Link Station No. for all stations for efficient use of the HS Link service • Communication cable used should be as per specifications • Ensure disconnected or short cables prior to installation • Ensure firm communication cable connector installation • For remote communication cable connections, ensure immunity from power line or inductive noise • Ensure systematic cable routing to avoid disconnection or connector damage • If using One IP solution then IP address configured for FEnet module must have even number in last octet • One IP solution is mainly used for 3rd Party HMI Systems which uses single IP and do not support SCADA redundancy
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
25
Describe FENet Configuration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
This page intentionally left blank
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
26
13
Describe FENet Configuration 2/2/2012
6
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Describe SNet Configuration
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Describe SNet Configuration 2/2/2012
27
Honeywell
Introduction • Snet Communication Interface Modules are used for Serial Bus Communication • The following Snet Modules are available with ML200R PLC: 1. Two ports for RS232C 2. Two ports for RS422/485 3. One RS232C port, one RS422/485 port 2MLL-C22A 2-channel RS-232C MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
28
14
2MLL-C42A
2MLL-C22A
2-channel 1-channel RS-232C RS-422/485 1-channel RS-422/485 Describe SNet Configuration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Snet Overview • Snet supports
Modbus RTU master/slave protocol Modbus ASCII master/slave protocol SoftMaster interface User-defined Protocol for interfacing with Third-party Devices Open standards of the RS232C/RS422/RS485 modules allow the ML PLC to communicate with a wide range of serial devices including: • Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) • Display Panels • Weigh Bridges • Barcode Readers • High-level computers or other Peer PLCs
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Describe SNet Configuration 2/2/2012
29
Honeywell
Installation and Wiring for RS-232 Connector
• RS-232C Channel Connector Pin assignment and signal information Pin No
Signal Name
Function
Signal Direction
Signal Description
1
CD
Carrier Detect
External to Snet
Informs DCE carrier detection to DTE
2
RxD
Received Data
External to Snet
Received data signal
3
TxD
Transmitted Data
Snet to External
Transmitted data signal
4
DTR
Data Terminal Ready
Snet to External
Informs DTE communication ready to DCE
5
SG
Signal Ground
Common
Signal ground line
6
DSR
Data Set Ready
External to Snet
Reports ready communication of DCE to DTE
7
RTS
Request To Send
Snet to External
DTE communicates to DCE to send data.
8
CTS
Clear To Send
External to Snet
DCE inform ready to transmit to DTE
9
RI
Ring
External to Snet
DCE inform receiving ‘Ringing Tone’ to DTE
– DTE: Data Terminal Equipment – DCE: Data Communication Equipment MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
30
15
Describe SNet Configuration 2/2/2012
6
– – – – –
Honeywell
Installation and Wiring for RS-232C •
Long Distance MODEM
Snet (9 pin)
Connecti vity
•
NULL MODEM
MODEM (25 pin)
Snet (9 pin)
Conne Communication ctivity Device
Pin
Name
Name
Pin
Pin
Name
Name
1
CD
CD
8
1
CD
CD
2
RxD
RxD
3
2
RxD
RxD
3
TxD
TxD
2
3
TxD
TxD
4
DTR
DTR
20
4
DTR
DTR
5
SG
SG
7
5
SG
SG
6
DSR
DSR
6
6
DSR
DSR
7
RTS
RTS
4
7
RTS
RTS
8
CTS
CTS
5
8
CTS
CTS
9
RI
RI
22
9
RI
RI
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Describe SNet Configuration 2/2/2012
31
Honeywell
Installation and Wiring for RS- 422
• RS-422 Channel Connector Pin assignment and signal information Pin No.
Signal Name
Signal Direction
Function
1
TX+
Snet to External
Transmitted Data (+)
2
TX-
Snet to External
Transmitted Data (-)
3
RX+
External to Snet
Received Data (+)
4
RX-
External to Snet
Received Data (-)
5
SG
Common
Signal Ground Line
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
32
16
Describe SNet Configuration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Installation and Wiring for RS-422 and RS-485 RS-422 Connections
•
RS-485 Connections
Pin No.
Signal Conne Name ctivity
Communicati on Device Signal
Pin No.
Signal Conne Name ctivity
Communicati on Device Signal
1
TX+
RX+
1
TX+
RX+
2
TX-
RX-
2
TX-
RX-
3
RX+
TX+
3
RX+
TX+
4
RX-
TX-
4
RX-
TX-
5
SG
SG
5
SG
SG
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
33
Describe SNet Configuration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Long Distance Communication • Architecture
– Dedicated modem for long distance communication between PC & PLCs
• Application – HMI Server acting as a MODBUS RTU master communicates with PLCs over RS232 using a modem – ML PLCs are communicating over RS422 HMI-PC
Snet # 1 station
RS-232C MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Snet # 2 station
Snet # N station
RS-422 communication Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
34
17
Describe SNet Configuration 2/2/2012
6
•
Honeywell
Interface to MODBUS RTU Slave Devices • Architecture – MODBUS RTU devices on RS422
• Application – RS232C Port of Snet Module can be used either for SoftMaster interface or HMI based on MODBUS RTU/ASCII – RS422 Port of Snet Module used as MODBUS RTU/ASCII master to communicate with 3rd Party MODBUS RTU slave devices such as a MOSAIC PANEL MOSAIC PANEL
7-SEGMENT
7-SEGMENT
8
HMI-PC Snet # 1 station
7-SEGMENT
7-SEGMENT
8 `
7-SEGMENT
8 7-SEGMENT
8 7-SEGMENT
8 RS-232C
7-SEGMENT
8
8 7-SEGMENT
8
8
7-SEGMENT
8 7-SEGMENT
8 7-SEGMENT
8
RS-422 communication
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Describe SNet Configuration 2/2/2012
35
Honeywell
Wireless MODEM Interface • Architecture – Wireless Modem on the RS232C Interface
• Application – MasterLogic PLC can act as the MODBUS RTU/ASCII Master
Wireless Modem
Wireless Modem
Master Logic-200R PLC Snet # 1 Station
8 7 Segment Display RS-232C
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
36
18
Describe SNet Configuration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Open SoftMaster-NM
• From the SoftMaster menu bar, select Tools Network Manager
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
37
Connect to ML200R PLC Using Serial Connection •
Describe SNet Configuration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Open SoftMaster-NM from SoftMaster – Select Project Open from PLC… – Define the Serial Connection Settings on the computer communicating to the ML PLC • Select Type: RS-232C – Click the Settings button • Configure the COM Port • Configure the Baud Rate • Click OK
•
Click Connect in the Online Settings window – In the event of an error message • Verify the connection settings, verify cable connections, and retry connecting
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
38
19
Describe SNet Configuration 2/2/2012
6
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Honeywell
Snet Configuration • In SoftMaster-NM – Open the Standard Settings for the Snet Module • Snet Modules are not allowed on Base 00
Double click on the Snet Module to open its Standard Settings
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
39
Describe SNet Configuration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Snet Configuration • Configure Channel 1 and Channel 2 Snet Parameters based on the Snet Module – Communication Settings • Channel specific settings for RS232C and RS485 – Time Settings • Configure delay time – Active Mode • Channel Settings for Server/Client Operations
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
40
20
Describe SNet Configuration 2/2/2012
Describe Profibus Interface Configuration Using Sycon
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
41
Describe Profibus Interface Configuration Using Sycon 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
• Profibus-DP (Decentral Periphery) Communication in the ML200R • Example Architecture: – Smart I/O Stand-alone Type on Station 1 connected to a Pnet Module – Smart I/O Extended Type on Station 2 connected to a Pnet Module Profibus Slave Devices - SYCON is used for Configuration Profibus-DP
ML200R based Profibus-DP master
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Station-0 Profibus-DP master 2MLL-PMEA
Station-1 Smart I/O
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
42
21
Station-2 Smart I/O (Extended Type)
Describe Profibus Interface Configuration Using Sycon 2/2/2012
6
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Honeywell
Features •
ML uses the Pnet Module for communication with devices connected to a Profibus-DP Network
•
Standardized Configuration – ML uses two software applications (SyCon and SoftMaster-NM) for configuring the parameters related to Profibus Communication – SYCON configures the MASTER and SLAVE devices: • Master – Pnet Module • Slave – Devices which are connected to a Pnet Module • SYCON has a GSD (a device description file) library for all Profibus devices – SoftMaster-NM is used for: • Pnet Configuration • Uploading Profibus network settings done in SYCON for Slave Memory allocations – It reads the Slave Settings from SyCon through Pnet • Diagnosing the Pnet Module
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
43
Describe Profibus Interface Configuration Using Sycon 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Basic Setup •
•
Basic setup for SYCON configuration requires a Pnet Module connected to the SYCON installed node through a RS-232 cable
Sycon Setup
RS-232C
Step 1 is the addition of a Profibus Master
1
– Pnet Module is the Profibus Master
•
2
Selection of a Master loads the GSD files required for the interface
3
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
44
22
Describe Profibus Interface Configuration Using Sycon 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Profibus Master Setup •
Master Settings are done from:
•
The Master Setup consists of:
– Settings Master Configuration Auto-addressing
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
45
Describe Profibus Interface Configuration Using Sycon 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Profibus Master Serial Driver Setup •
Sycon Serial Driver supports COM1 to COM 4 interfaces in the PC
•
Select Settings Device Assignment
Select the Applicable Serial Port
– Select the COM port to which the Pnet Module is connected
•
When a COM Port is selected: – The Master is identified by the SyCon Serial driver – The Master performs an Automatic Network Scan – The Master identifies and displays the Slave Devices found on the network
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Accept the result of the “Automatic Network Scan”
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
46
23
Describe Profibus Interface Configuration Using Sycon 2/2/2012
6
– “Auto addressing” checkbox -selected for automatic addressing of the slaves to be connected – DP Master Settings • “Buffered, host controlled” option is selected since it is the common process in Profibus – Bus Parameter • Invoked from Settings Bus Parameters • Used to configure the Baud Rate and optimization settings • Use the default settings
Honeywell
Slave Configuration •
Select Settings Slave Configuration from the menu bar to perform the Slave Configuration
•
In Slave Configuration, memory allocation is done for the Slave Devices:
Select the slave device
– Addresses in the Pnet Module are mapped with the parameters in the Slave Device – Addresses entered here must be identical with the addresses set in SoftMaster-NM Modules attached to Extended SMART IO (Station-2) are listed
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
47
Describe Profibus Interface Configuration Using Sycon 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Slave Communication Parameter Setup •
Slave Parameter Data is configured from Settings Parameter Data – Individual channels of the Slave Device are configured here – In the Profibus architecture example, Station-2 has Extended IO • Configuration of Extended IO Modules is shown below 1
2
3
Slave Extended IO Configuration
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
48
24
Describe Profibus Interface Configuration Using Sycon 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Configuration Download •
Select the Master from SYCON
•
Download the slave configuration to the Master from:
Select the Master to download
– “Online Download”
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
49
Describe Profibus Interface Configuration Using Sycon 2/2/2012
Honeywell
This page intentionally left blank
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
50
25
Describe Profibus Interface Configuration Using Sycon 2/2/2012
6
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Describe DeviceNet Interface configuration using SYCON
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe DeviceNet Interface configuration using SYCON
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
2/2/2012
51
Honeywell
Introduction • DeviceNet Communication in the ML200R – Devices are assigned a unique MAC ID for identification
• Example Architecture: – Smart I/O stand-alone type set with MAC ID 1 – Smart I/O extended type set with MAC ID 2
SYCON for DeviceNet Slave Configuration
ML200R based DeviceNet Master
MAC-ID-1 Smart I/O MAC ID-0 DeviceNet Master
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
MAC-ID-2 Smart I/O (Extended Type)
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe DeviceNet Interface configuration using SYCON
52
26
2/2/2012
Honeywell
Features
• ML uses the Dnet Module for communication with devices connected to the DeviceNet Network • Standardized Configuration – ML uses two software applications (SyCon and SoftMaster-NM) for configuring the parameters related to DeviceNet communication – SYCON configures the MASTER and SLAVE devices: • Master – Dnet module • Slave – Devices which are connected to the Dnet module • SYCON has an EDS (Electronic Data Sheet files) library for all DeviceNet devices – SoftMaster-NM is used for: • Uploading DeviceNet network settings from SYCON • Diagnosing the Dnet module Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe DeviceNet Interface configuration using SYCON
2/2/2012
53
Honeywell
Basic Setup •
Basic setup for SYCON configuration requires a Dnet module connected to the SYCON installed node through an RS-232 cable
•
Step 1 is the addition of a DeviceNet Master:
Sycon Setup
RS-232C
1
– The Dnet Module is the DeviceNet Master 2
•
Selection of a Master loads the EDS files required for the interface
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Master is now added
3
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe DeviceNet Interface configuration using SYCON
54
27
2/2/2012
6
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Honeywell
DeviceNet Master Setup •
Master Settings are done from:
•
The Master Setup consists of:
– Settings Master Settings – MAC ID • Unique address from 0 to 63 – Name • Alphanumeric name – “Buffered, host controlled” option is selected for Handshake of the process data – Bus Parameter • Invoked from Settings Bus Parameters • Used to configure the baud rate and optimization settings • Use the default settings
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe DeviceNet Interface configuration using SYCON
2/2/2012
55
Honeywell
DeviceNet Master Serial Driver Setup •
Sycon Serial Driver supports COM1 to COM 4 interfaces in the PC
•
Select Settings Device Assignment: –
•
Select the Applicable Serial Port
When the COM Port is selected: – – –
•
Select the COM port to which the Dnet Module is connected
Select OK for Automatic Network Scan
The Master is identified by the SyCon Serial driver The Master performs an Automatic Network Scan The Master identifies and displays the slave devices found on the network
Select “Polling” as the chosen configuration for each slave –
Polling is a specific type of function supported by the device
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe DeviceNet Interface configuration using SYCON
56
28
2/2/2012
Honeywell
Slave Configuration •
Select “Settings Slave Configuration” to perform the Slave configuration
•
Configure “Parameter Data”
1
– Default values are set and are available from the EDS file – Channel-specific data can be configured here by the user
Select the Device 2
3
Select / Double click to customize Parameters
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe DeviceNet Interface configuration using SYCON
2/2/2012
57
Honeywell
Configuration Download •
Select the Master from SYCON
•
Download the slave configuration to the Master from: – Online Download Select the Master to Download
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe DeviceNet Interface configuration using SYCON
58
29
2/2/2012
6
MasterLogic Communication Protocols
The modules attached to Extended SMART IO (Station-2) are listed
This page was intentionally left blank.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
Topic: MasterLogic Communication Protocols Contents
6
Configure the Profibus communication..................................................................................................3
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
1
This page was intentionally left blank.
2
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
MasterLogic Communication Protocols Configure the Profibus communication
Configure the Profibus communication Practice Objective •
The objective of this LAB is to demonstrate the communication between the ML200R PLC and Smart (Profibus) I/Os with a PMEA module.
•
This lab is only for reference.
Prerequisites
•
SoftMaster - MasterLogic Programming software is installed.
•
Sycon – Smart I/O configuration software is installed.
•
ML200R controller is available with a Profibus Communication module (Pnet) along with Profibus I/Os and connected to the network.
•
Switch and network connections are established for the ML200R controller.
•
Experion Server or Client machine is available with Experion Engineering Tools loaded on it.
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
6
The procedures mentioned in this lab assume the following:
3
MasterLogic Communication Protocols Configure the Profibus communication
Detailed Instructions – Reference Only
Step
Action
Configure communication settings for Profibus Devices. 1 ATTENTION This lab is only for reference only and will not be performed in class.
2
4
Open SoftMaster application from Start All Programs SoftMaster SoftMaster.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
MasterLogic Communication Protocols Configure the Profibus communication
Step 3
Action From the Project menu in SoftMaster, select “Open from PLC…”
TIP
6
Open from PLC will upload the project information from the PLC along with the hardware details. Open Project will open a previously configured project in the offline mode. New Project will create a new project in the offline mode.
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
5
MasterLogic Communication Protocols Configure the Profibus communication
Step 4
Action In Online Settings, select USB as the connection type, and click Connect.
ATTENTION Connection type can be USB, Extended base USB or RS-232C with depth Local. If the connection type selected is RS-232C, then click the Settings tab and select the COM Port used and enter the baud rate. Ethernet Connection cannot be used because FEnet Module is not yet configured.
6
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
MasterLogic Communication Protocols Configure the Profibus communication
Step 5
Action In response to the SoftMaster information dialog box, click OK.
TIP If the connection is successfully established, the above dialog box appears. If the connection is unsuccessful, then an error dialog box will appear stating “Cannot use USB port. Check the connection state and try again”. If you get an error message, verify the connection setting and cable connections and retry.
In the Project Window of SoftMaster, double click on I/O Parameter.
6
6
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
7
MasterLogic Communication Protocols Configure the Profibus communication
Step
Action
7
Check the I/O modules in the I/O Parameter Setting Window
8
Click OK.
9
Open the SyCon application from Start All Programs SyCon System Configurator SyCon.
10
8
In the SyCon.EXE menu bar select File New.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
MasterLogic Communication Protocols Configure the Profibus communication Step
Action
11
In the Select fieldbus dialog box select PROFIBUS
12
Click OK.
13
In the SyCon.EXE menu bar select File Save.
14
In the Save as dialog box enter the File name of Profibus Module configuration and click Save.
6
ATTENTION The file name Profibus Module configuration is used for class. In a real plant scenario, it can be different. The default path for the program will be C:\ Program Files\SyCon\Project. This path can be changed as required. This file is saved with a .pb extension.
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
9
MasterLogic Communication Protocols Configure the Profibus communication
Step
Action
15
In the SyCon.EXE menu bar select Insert Master.
16
In the Insert Master dialog box select COM-C-DPM from the Available masters area and click ADD>>.
ATTENTION COM-C-DPM is the relevant Master for a ML200R PLC.
17
10
Click OK.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
MasterLogic Communication Protocols Configure the Profibus communication Step
Action
18
In the SyCon.EXE menu bar, select Settings Master Configuration.
19
In the Master Configuration dialog box select Auto addressing and click DP Master Settings … to open the DP Mater settings dialog box.
6
ATTENTION The settings specified above are specific to this class.
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
11
MasterLogic Communication Protocols Configure the Profibus communication
12
Step
Action
20
In the DP Master Settings window select Buffered, host controlled in the Handshake of the process data section.
21
Click OK to close the DP Master Settings window.
22
Click OK to close the Master Configuration window.
23
In the SyCon.EXE menu bar select Insert Slave and click in SyCon.EXE window.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
MasterLogic Communication Protocols Configure the Profibus communication
Step 24
Action In the Insert Slave dialog box select the following: Vendor: Honeywell Select the Available slaves: MPL-D22A/C and MPL-TR2A/B/C Click ADD>>.
Click OK.
26
In the SyCon.EXE window select Slave1.
6
25
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
13
MasterLogic Communication Protocols Configure the Profibus communication
14
Step
Action
27
From the menu bar in the SyCon.EXE window, select Settings Slave Configuration.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
MasterLogic Communication Protocols Configure the Profibus communication Step
Action
28
In the Slave Configuration window verify the Station address and Assigned master for all the slaves.
6
ATTENTION Station addresses should match with the physical addresses set by the switches on the modules. The Address Settings specified above are specific to this class.
2/2/2012
29
Click OK.
30
Repeat steps 26 to 29 for Slave2.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
15
MasterLogic Communication Protocols Configure the Profibus communication
16
Step
Action
31
In the SyCon.EXE window select Master0.
32
In the SyCon.EXE menu bar, select Settings Bus Parameter...
33
In the Bus Parameter dialog box set the Baud rate at 1500 kBits/s and set Optimize at Standard.
34
Click OK.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
MasterLogic Communication Protocols Configure the Profibus communication Step
Action
35
In the SyCon.EXE window menu bar select Settings Device Assignment...
36
In the Device Assignment CIF Serial Driver dialog box select COM 1 and click Connect COM 1.
37
Click OK in the Device Assignment CIF Serial Driver dialog box
38
In the SyCon.EXE menu bar select Online Download…
6
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
17
MasterLogic Communication Protocols Configure the Profibus communication
Step
Action
39
Click Yes in response to the Question dialog box.
40
Wait for the Master Download process to complete.
41
From the SoftMaster menu bar select Tools Network Manager.
TIP Network Manager (SoftMaster-NM) is a separate tool within SoftMaster and is used for configuration of communication related information.
18
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
MasterLogic Communication Protocols Configure the Profibus communication Step
Action
42
From the SoftMaster-NM menu bar select File Open from PLC…
43
In Online Settings, select USB as the connection type, and click Connect.
6
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
19
MasterLogic Communication Protocols Configure the Profibus communication
Step 44
Action Enter the Project name as Profibus Settings and click OK
ATTENTION The Program name Profibus Settings is used for class. In a real plant scenario, this can be the name of the plant or the process it controls. The default path for the program will be C:\SoftMaster\. This path can be changed as required. This project is saved with an .xfg extension. All Communication settings are stored in this file.
20
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
MasterLogic Communication Protocols Configure the Profibus communication
Step
Action
45
Wait for the parameters to be read.
46
In the Project window in SoftMaster-NM, ensure that the Pnet Module is present in Standard settings tab. Click on High-speed Link tab. Double click on High-speed Link 01.
6
47
TIP The maximum number of High-speed Links is 12.
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
21
MasterLogic Communication Protocols Configure the Profibus communication
Step 48
Action In the Communication Module Settings window, select the following: Module type: Pnet Base # : 01 Slot # : 07 Period type: 50msec.
TIP The settings specified above are specific to this class.
22
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
MasterLogic Communication Protocols Configure the Profibus communication
Step
Action
49
Click OK.
50
Double-click on Block from the High-speed Link tab in the Project window to open the block settings window.
51
In the Block window click on any cell.
52
Pnet configuration settings are already done using SyCon software; therefore, the settings will be uploaded from SyCon to SoftMaster-NM.
6
Select Online Sycon Upload (Dnet, Pnet) in SoftMaster-NM.
TIP The settings specified above are specific to this class.
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
23
MasterLogic Communication Protocols Configure the Profibus communication
Step 53
Action Specify the Read area as % MW350 and Write area as %MW355.
ATTENTION Station 1 corresponds to Slave 1. It is a DI Module (MPL-D22C) Station 2 corresponds to Slave 2. It is a DO Module (MPL-TR2C) Slave modules used here are 16 channels DI/DO modules. One channel corresponds to one bit. So for 16 channels, 2 bytes are used for Sending/Receiving (16 bits). The settings specified above are specific to this class.
54
24
From the menu bar of SoftMaster-NM select Online Write Parameter to download the settings.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
MasterLogic Communication Protocols Configure the Profibus communication Step
Action
55
Select the High-speed Link 01 as shown.
56
Click OK.
57
Wait for the Write parameter function to finish.
58
From the SoftMaster-NM menu bar select OnlineEnable Link.
6
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
25
MasterLogic Communication Protocols Configure the Profibus communication
26
Step
Action
59
Select High-speed Link 01 and click on Write.
60
Click OK in response to the dialog box.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
MasterLogic Communication Protocols Configure the Profibus communication
Step Close the Enable Link dialog box.
6
61
Action
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
27
MasterLogic Communication Protocols Configure the Profibus communication
Step
Action
Verify the communication for Profibus Modules. 62
From the SoftMaster menu bar select Monitor Address Monitoring.
63
Double-click on M in the address tree of the Address Monitoring window and write data “0000100010101110” in %MW355 (Read Area for PLC1).
ATTENTION To view a memory address in word format (%MW355) 16 bit from the select ViewView Options menu bar in the Address Monitoring window. To view the values in binary format select Binary from the menu bar ViewView Options in the Address Monitoring window.
28
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
MasterLogic Communication Protocols Configure the Profibus communication
Step 64
Action Observe the data on MPL TR2A (DO Module)
ATTENTION The DO Module has 16 LED’s (one for each bit). Based on the value (0 or 1) written in each bit, the LED’s will turn ON or OFF. 65
Write data “1001100111111111” by setting the corresponding channels of MPL D22C (DI module) and observe the results in the Write area (%MW350) of the PLC.
6
ATTENTION The Channel has to be simulated manually or using a program. The value of channel 0 has to be ON, channel 1 = OFF, Channel 2 = OFF, Channel 3 = ON and so on… To view a memory address in word format (%MW355) 16 bit from the select ViewView Options menu bar in the Address Monitoring window. To view values in binary format select Binary from the menu bar ViewView Options in the Address Monitoring window.
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
29
MasterLogic Communication Protocols Configure the Profibus communication
This page was intentionally left blank.
30
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
Describe MODBUS
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Describe MODBUS 4/25/2012
1
Honeywell
Introduction
• Modbus TCP is the most widely used open protocol specification based on TCP/IP and UDP/IP – MasterLogic PLC provides both Modbus Server (Slave) and Modbus Client (Master) functions
HMI /SCADA /DCS etc…
Modbus TCP Server (Slave)
Modbus TCP Frame
7
Modbus TCP Client (Master)
MasterLogic PLC
Request (Command)
Response
Third Party Device.
MasterLogic PLC
• Max. 250 bytes of data can be read or written by a single command • Modbus can Read or Write to only direct variable addresses (%I, %Q, %M, %R) in ML200R PLC
• Configure ML200R as Modbus Server/Client Network
Ethernet
Service Name
MasterLogic-200R PLC parameters required to be set for MODBUS TCP service Standard Parameter
HSL Parameter
P2P Ch.
P2P Block
User Frame
Modbus Client (Master)
○
X
○
○
X
Modbus Server (Slave)
○
X
X
X
X
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Remarks
P2P Parameter
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
2
1
○ Required X Not required
Describe MODBUS 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Modbus Serial Server • Snet Interface Module as Modbus Server Modbus Server
Modbus Client
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
3
Describe MODBUS 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Configure Modbus Serial Server • Open SoftMaster-NM Select ‘Online’ menu and click ‘Connect’ to connect to the PLC
Modules available on the ML200R base will appear in the Project Window
Select ‘Read IO Information’
Double click the Snet Module to open the Standard Settings window
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4
2
Describe MODBUS 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Configure Modbus Serial Server
• Depending on type of client, select: Ensure that Channel Type is selected based on the hardware type
– Modbus ASCII Server – Modbus RTU Server
Any of the two channels can be configured as a Modbus Server
Specify Read and Write addresses in Modbus setting of respective channels
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
5
Modbus Serial Server - Modbus Address Settings •
Describe MODBUS 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Snet as a Modbus Server Writes data to be sent to clients in the write address area – Client writes response in the read address area, and the server reads the response from this location
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
6
3
7
–
Describe MODBUS 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Modbus Serial Server – Write Configuration to PLC • In Online menu – Select ‘Write Parameter’ to write configuration to PLC – Select ‘Snet’ in the Write Parameter Standard settings – Click OK
• On successful download, reset the ML200R PLC – Select Online Reset Reset PLC
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Describe MODBUS 4/25/2012
7
Honeywell
Modbus Serial Client • Snet Interface Module as Modbus Client Modbus Server
Modbus Client
Station: 2
Station: 1
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
8
4
Describe MODBUS 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Configure Modbus Serial Client • Open SoftMaster-NM Select ‘Online’ menu and click ‘Connect’ to connect to the PLC
Select ‘Read IO Information’
Double-click the Snet Module to open the Standard Settings Window
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
9
Describe MODBUS 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Configure Modbus Serial Client
7
Ensure the Channel Type is selected based on the hardware type
Select ‘Use P2P settings’ to configure Snet as a Modbus Client
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
10
5
Describe MODBUS 4/25/2012
Modbus Serial Client - P2P Configuration • Select the P2P tab in SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Select Snet
Select any P2P slot and double click to open its Communication Settings
In the P2P Channel Setting, select the P2P Driver as Modbus RTU/Modbus ASCII client based on the Modbus Server MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
11
Describe MODBUS 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Modbus Serial Client • Function Code Memory Mapping Table
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
12
6
Describe MODBUS 4/25/2012
Modbus Serial Client - Function Codes
Honeywell
• Modbus Function Code 01 (Read Coil Status)
Read address 0x00000 indicates the Function Code 01
Double-click P2P Bock
User editable memory address
Select the data type as BIT for Function Code 01
Select Single to read Single Bit or Continuous to read Multiple Bits
Select Snet Channel configured as Modbus Client
Select Destination station number of Modbus Server
Select Trigger Flag
Select Modbus RTU Client
Select P2P function as Read for Function Code 01
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
13
Modbus Serial Client - Function Codes • Modbus Function Code 05 (Force Single Coil)
Honeywell Write address 0x00000 indicates Function Code is 05
7
User editable value
Describe MODBUS 4/25/2012
Double-click P2P Block Select the data type as ‘BIT’ for Function Code 05
Select Single to read Single Bit or Continuous to read Multiple Bits
Select Snet Channel configured as Modbus Client Select Modbus RTU Client
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Select Destination station number of Modbus Server
Select Trigger Fag Select P2P Function as Read for Function Code 05 Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
14
7
Describe MODBUS 4/25/2012
Modbus Serial Client - Write Configuration to PLC
Honeywell
• Select the Online Menu – Click ‘Write Parameter’ to Write configuration to PLC – Select ‘Snet’ in the Write Parameter standard settings – Select the ‘P2P 01’ slot – Click OK
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
15
Modbus Serial Client - Write Configuration to PLC
Describe MODBUS 4/25/2012
Honeywell
• Select the Online Menu – Select ‘Enable Link’ – Enable the P2P 01 slot – Click Write
• On successful Write, reset the ML200R PLC – Select Online Reset Reset PLC
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
16
8
Describe MODBUS 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Modbus TCP/IP Server • FEnet Interface Module as Modbus Server
Modbus TCP/IP Client
Modbus Server
Hub
IP address: 200.200.200.200
IP address: 200.200.200.20
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
17
Modbus TCP/IP Server - Configuration
Describe MODBUS 4/25/2012
Honeywell
• Open SoftMaster-NM
7
Select ‘Online’ menu and click ‘Connect’ to connect to the PLC
Select ‘Read IO Information’
Double click FEnet Module to open the Standard Settings Wndow
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
18
9
Describe MODBUS 4/25/2012
Modbus TCP/IP Server - Configuration
Honeywell
Specify Read and Write Addresses
Select Modbus TCP/IP Server as Driver
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
19
Modbus TCP/IP Server - Write Configuration to PLC
Describe MODBUS 4/25/2012
Honeywell
• Select Online Menu – Click ‘Write Parameter’ to write configuration to PLC – Select ‘FEnet’ in Write Parameter Standard settings – Click OK
• On successful download, reset the ML200R PLC – Select Online Reset Reset PLC
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
20
10
Describe MODBUS 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Modbus TCP/IP Client • FEnet as Modbus Client Modbus TCP/IP Client
Modbus Server
Hub
IP Address: 200.200.200.30
IP Address: 200.200.200.100
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
21
Modbus TCP/IP Client - Configuration
Describe MODBUS 4/25/2012
Honeywell
• Open SoftMaster-NM
7
Select ‘Online’ menu and click ‘Connect’ to connect to the PLC
Select ‘Read IO Information’
Double click ‘FEnet’ Module to open the Standard Settings Window MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
22
11
Describe MODBUS 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Modbus TCP/IP Client - SM NM Configuration
Select ‘MLDP Server’ as Driver
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Describe MODBUS 4/25/2012
23
Honeywell
Modbus TCP/IP Client - P2P Configuration • Select P2P tab in SoftMaster-NM
Select FEnet
Select any P2P Slot and double click to open its Communication Settings
Open the P2P Channel settings and select Modbus TCP Client as THE P2P Driver
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Enter Modbus Server IP Address Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
24
12
Describe MODBUS 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Modbus TCP Client - Function Codes • Modbus Function Code 04 (Read Input Registers)
User editable value
Read address 0x30000 indicates the Function Code is 04 Double-click P2P block
Select the data type as WORD for Function Code 04
Select Single to read single word or Continuous to read multiple word values
Select P2P channel configured as Modbus client
Select Trigger flag Select Modbus TCP client
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Function Code 04 is a Read function Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
25
Modbus TCP/IP Client - Write Configuration to PLC
Describe MODBUS 4/25/2012
Honeywell
• Select Online Menu
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
7
– Click ‘Write Parameter’ to Write configuration to PLC – Select ‘FEnet’ in the Write parameter standard settings – Click OK
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
26
13
Describe MODBUS 4/25/2012
Modbus TCP/IP Client - Write Configuration to PLC
Honeywell
• Select Online Menu – Select ‘Enable Link’ – Enable the P2P 01 slot – Click Write
• On successful write, reset the ML200R PLC – Select Online Reset Reset PLC
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
27
Describe MODBUS 4/25/2012
Honeywell
This page intentionally left blank
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
28
14
Describe MODBUS 4/25/2012
Describe the High Speed Link
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Describe the High Speed Link 4/25/2012
29
Honeywell
Introduction
• High-speed Link is a communication method between two ML PLCs
ML200R PLC 1
7
– Maximum 128 blocks can be configured per HS link for data transfer – For each Block, specific addresses can be configured to store the transmit data and received data ML200R PLC 2
High Speed Link
• HS Link Communication Data Capacity Classification
Maximum communication words
Maximum send words
Maximum blocks
Maximum words per block
2MLL-EFMT
25600
12800
128(0-127)
200
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
30
15
Describe the High Speed Link 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Configure High-Speed Link • Communication Modules for High-speed Links: – FEnet (explained in this module) – Pnet – Dnet
• In SoftMaster-NM
– Connect to ML200R PLC – Open the FEnet module Standard Settings window – Verify that the IP Address associated with the FEnet Module is correct – Write the configuration to ML200R PLC – Reset ML200R PLC
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Describe the High Speed Link 4/25/2012
31
Honeywell
Configure HS Link Parameters • In SoftMaster-NM, select the High-speed Link Tab 12 HS links are available for configuration
Double click the HS Link to open the Communication Module Settings Window
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
32
16
Describe the High Speed Link 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Configure Communication Module Settings
Select the Module Type, Base Number and Slot Number
Select the appropriate communication period
HS Link Block settings window opens
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
33
Describe the High Speed Link 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Configure HS Link Block Settings
7
Select the Station type ‘Master’ for the FEnet Module (Slave function is not supported for HS link)
Select ‘Mode’ for the Block
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
34
17
Describe the High Speed Link 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Configure HS Link Block Settings (continued) • Configure a Send Block
Memory Address location of the data to be transmitted
Station Number of the transmitting FEnet Module
Size of the data to be transmitted in WORD Units
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Describe the High Speed Link 4/25/2012
35
Honeywell
Configure HS Link Block Settings (continued) • Configure Receive Block Memory Address location to store the received data
Station Number of the transmitting FEnet Module
Size of the data received in WORD Units
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
36
18
Describe the High Speed Link 4/25/2012
Download HS Link Parameters to PLC
Honeywell
• In SoftMaster-NM, select Online Write Parameters (Standard Settings, HS Link, P2P)
Select the configured High-speed Link to download and click OK
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
37
Describe the High Speed Link 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Enable HS Link Parameters
Select the High-speed Link and click Write
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
38
19
Describe the High Speed Link 4/25/2012
7
• In SoftMaster-NM, select Online Enable Link (HS Link, P2P)
Honeywell
HS Link Communication Station #1 Block configuration
In the case of SEND Mode, the Station# is grayed out Block 1 (%MW200 ~ %MW231)
Station #1 Block 0 (%MW100 ~ %MW115)
OK
OK
Station #2
Station #5 Station #5 receives data from Block 0 of Station 1 Station #5 Block configuration
Ignore OK
Station #3
OK
Ignore Station #4 is not configured to receive data from any Block
Station #4 Station #3 Block Configuration
Station #3 receives both Block 0 & 1 data from Station #1
Depending on the Block Configuration of the receiving station, Data Blocks from the Master Station are accepted or ignored by the receiving station
Station #2 Block configuration
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
39
Describe the High Speed Link 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Monitor HS Link • In SoftMaster-NM – Click Online System Diagnosis
Right click on the FEnet Module and select ‘Status by Service’
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
40
20
Describe the High Speed Link 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Monitor HS Link • Select the ‘HS Link Service’ tab to view the status of HS Links
Note that the HS Link LED on the FEnet Module is ON
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
41
Describe the High Speed Link 4/25/2012
7
Honeywell
This page intentionally left blank
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
42
21
Describe the High Speed Link 4/25/2012
Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
43
Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
• Peer to Peer communication is used to communicate between two ML PLC or third party devices • FEnet Interface module supports six P2P commands – Read, Write, Send, Receive, ESend and EReceive
• Snet interface module supports four P2P commands – Read, Write, Send, Receive
• Both FEnet and Snet modules support 8 P2P parameters with 64 blocks for each parameter • User frame definition – Used to create the frame as per communication requirement of the destination module
• Email – Email notification for events such as: • PLC mode changes • Occurrence of errors
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
44
22
Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication 4/25/2012
P2P Master Controller – FEnet Configuration
Honeywell
• Open SoftMaster-NM • Connect to PLC Click Read I/O Information
Double-click to open standard settings window Select ‘Modbus TCP/IP server’ as driver if Modbus TCP communication is to be used for P2P
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
45
Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Configure P2P Parameter
• Configure P2P settings for FEnet module if controller is acting as Master in P2P communication
7
– In SoftMaster-NM, click P2P parameter tab
Double-click to open Communication Module setting window
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
46
23
Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Configure P2P Parameter for FEnet Module • Communication Module Setting
Select FEnet module. Verify the Base number and Slot number are correct.
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Double click Channel to open the Channel setting window
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
47
Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Configure P2P Parameter for FEnet Module • Channel Setting
– Modbus TCP/IP driver is used to communicate with the third party devices supporting Modbus protocol – User Frame definition driver is used to send user defined frames – MLDP client is used for communicating to the ML200 FEnet I/F Modules
Two channels are configured for two different P2P Drivers
Select P2P Driver as per requirement
FEnet Driver is selected as Modbus TCP/IP Server
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Select the IP Address of the device to communicate Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
48
24
Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Configure P2P Parameter for FEnet Module • Block Settings of FEnet from the P2P 01 link For Modbus TCP/IP driver Read and Write P2P functions are available
Driver Settings are populated directly depending upon channel selected
Select Single to read single value and Continuous to read multiple values
Select the Channel number configured
Used to trigger the communication
User frame definition driver is used for the devices that do not support Modbus TCP/IP protocol
For Modbus TCP/IP driver BIT and WORD data types are available
For user frame definition driver Send and Receive P2P functions are available
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
49
Configure P2P Parameter for FEnet Module
Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication 4/25/2012
Honeywell
• Block Settings Activated when ‘Continuous’ is selected in Command type. Enter the number of values to read
7
Select the already defined frame
• Memory settings
Address settings for Write operation
Address settings for Read operation
Area of the communicating device to Read
Enter the address containing the data to be transmitted
Enter the address to save the read data
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
50
25
Area of the communicating device to Write
Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication 4/25/2012
Download P2P Configuration to PLC
Honeywell
• Click Online Write Parameter
Select FEnet and P2P parameter to be downloaded and click OK
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
51
Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Enable P2P Parameter Link • Click Online Enable Link
Select P2P parameter to be enabled and click Write
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
52
26
Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication 4/25/2012
P2P Slave Controller – FEnet Configuration • •
Honeywell
Open SoftMaster-NM Connect to PLC
Click Read I/O Information
Double-click to open standard settings window Select ‘Modbus TCP/IP server’ as driver if Modbus TCP communication is to be used for P2P
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
53
No need to configure P2P settings for interface module on a controller acting as P2P slave
Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Monitor P2P Parameter • Open SoftMaster-NM
7
– Click Online System Diagnosis
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
54
27
Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication 4/25/2012
P2P Master Controller – Snet Configuration
Honeywell
• Open SoftMaster-NM • Connect to PLC Click Read I/O Information
Ensure that ‘Use P2P settings’ is selected as Active mode
Double click to open standard settings window
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
55
Configure P2P Parameter for Snet module
Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication 4/25/2012
Honeywell
• Configure P2P settings for Snet module if controller is acting as Master in P2P communication
Select the P2P driver as per requirement
Double click to open P2P Channel settings
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
56
28
Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication 4/25/2012
Configure P2P Parameter for Snet Module
Honeywell
• Configure P2P parameter block Select the station number of the device to communicate
For Modbus client driver, Read and Write P2P functions are available
For User frame definition driver, Send and Receive P2P functions are available
If selected, the destination station number is fixed
• If the destination station checkbox is unchecked, the destination station number is read from PLC memory location which can be varied to change the destination station number
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
57
Download P2P Configuration of to PLC
Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication 4/25/2012
Honeywell
7
• Click Online Write Parameter
Select Snet and P2P parameter to be downloaded and click OK
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
58
29
Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Enable P2P Parameter Link • Click Online Enable Link
Select P2P parameter to be enabled and click Write
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
59
P2P Slave Controller – Snet Configuration
Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication 4/25/2012
Honeywell
• Open SoftMaster-NM • Connect to PLC Click Read I/O Information
No need to configure P2P settings for interface module on a controller acting as P2P slave
Double click to open standard settings window
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Select ‘Modbus ASCII server’ if Modbus protocol is used for P2P communication
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
60
30
Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Monitor P2P Parameter • Open SoftMaster-NM – Click Online System Diagnosis
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication 4/25/2012
61
Honeywell
Configuring User Frame Definition
Enter the Group name and select the Frame type
• Group consist of frames having identical header and tail • Frame type decides whether the frame is to be transmitted or received MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
62
31
Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication 4/25/2012
7
• In SoftMaster-NM, right click on User Frame Definition and click Add Group
Honeywell
Configuring User Frame Definition • Every frame consist of a Head, Body, and Tail
– Each Head, Body, and Tail comprised of data in form of segments
• Add Frames to group – Right-click the group and select Add Frame – Click Add Frame each time when you add a frame
1 2
Enter the name of the body frame and click OK
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
3
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
63
Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Configuring User Frame Definition • After adding the frames, the frames appear in project window
Right click in edit frame window of Test and click Add Segment
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
64
32
Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Configuring User Frame Definition • Segments are added from the Frame edit window
Right click on Frame edit window of Test and click Add Segment
– Add one Numerical Constant segment and one String Constant segment
For FEnet module, three types of segments can be added to frame
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
For Snet module, four types of segments can be added to frame
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
65
Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Types of segments • Numerical Constant – Data is in form of constant numeric value – Data is specified as Hex value
• String Constant
7
– Data is in form of constant string value – Data is specified as ASCII characters
• Fixed Size Variable – Used to send the fixed size frame
Define the size of the frame for Fixed size variable
• Variable Sized Variable – Used to send variable sized frame
Define the size of the frame while configuring P2P block in case of Variable sized variable MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
66
33
Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication 4/25/2012
Honeywell Configuring User Frame Definition • After adding the segments, the segments appear in the Frame Edit window
• Open the Block Configuration window and select the defined frame in the Frame column – Block Configuration of FEnet module
– Block Configuration of Snet module
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
67
Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication 4/25/2012
Honeywell
This page intentionally left blank
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
68
34
Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication 4/25/2012
Topic: MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Contents Configure a MODBUS Server ................................................................................................................3 Configure a MODBUS Client ...............................................................................................................29
7
Configure the High Speed Link............................................................................................................53
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
1
This page was intentionally left blank.
2
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure a MODBUS Server
Configure a MODBUS Server Objective The objective of this lab is to demonstrate the MODBUS Server Communication using Modbus TCP Protocol established between the ML200R PLC and the MODBUS device. Pre-requisites •
SoftMaster MasterLogic Programming software tool
•
Modbus Simulator (MDBUS.exe) available and
•
ML200R controller with FEnet Module connected to the network
•
Switch and network connections established to the ML200R controller
Introduction The communication between the ML PLC and a Modbus device (simulated) is established by configuring MODBUS Server settings in SoftMaster and SoftMaster NM. SoftMaster is the ML200R Programming Software.
•
SoftMaster NM is software tool, under SoftMaster, used for configuration of the communication related parameters.
7
•
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
3
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure a MODBUS Server
Partition Sheet
Item
Value to be Entered
FEnet Module A-side IP address FEnet Module B-side IP address FEnet Module A-side HS link Station No.
4
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure a MODBUS Server
Detailed Instructions
Step
Action
Configure MLPLC as Modbus Server Open SoftMaster from Start All Programs SoftMaster SoftMaster.
7
1
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
5
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure a MODBUS Server
Step 2
Action From the Project Menu in SoftMaster, select “New Project”.
TIP Open from PLC will upload the project information from the PLC along with the hardware details. Open Project will open a previously configured project in the offline mode. New Project will create a new project in the offline mode.
6
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure a MODBUS Server
Step 3
Action Enter Project Name as Modbus_Comm
7
Click OK
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
7
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure a MODBUS Server
Step 4
Action From the SoftMaster menu, select Tools Network Manager.
TIP Network Manager (SoftMaster-NM) is a separate tool within SoftMaster and is used for configuration of communication parameters.
5
8
From the SoftMaster-NM menu bar, select File Open from PLC.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure a MODBUS Server
Step 6
Action In Online Settings, select USB as the connection type, and click Connect.
ATTENTION Connection type can be USB, Extended base USB or RS-232C with depth Local.
7
If the connection type selected is RS-232C, then click the Settings tab and select the COM Port used and enter the baud rate. Ethernet Connections cannot be used because FEnet Module is not yet configured.
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
9
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure a MODBUS Server
Step 7
Action Enter the following Project name: FEnet Settings Change the File directory to C:\SoftMaster\FEnet Settings
ATTENTION The Program name FEnet Settings is used for our class. In a real plant scenario this could be the name of the plant or process it controls. The default path for the program will be C:\SoftMaster\. This path can be changed as required. This project’s filename is saved with an .xfg extension. All communication settings are stored in this file. 8
10
Click OK.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure a MODBUS Server Step
Action
9
Wait for the parameters to be read from the PLC.
10
Double-click on FEnet in the Project window to configure properties for the FEnet module.
7
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
11
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure a MODBUS Server
Step 11
Action Set the IP address, HS link Station No. and select the Driver Modbus TCP/IP Server for the A-side in TCP/IP settings.
TIP Refer the partition sheet at the start of the lab for your HS Link Station Number and IP address.
12
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure a MODBUS Server
Step 12 13
Action Click on Modbus Settings in the Driver (server) Settings area of the Standard Settings dialog box. In Modbus Settings dialog box enter the following: Bit read area Address: %MX10 Bit write area Address: %MX50 Word read area Address: %MW10 Word write area Address: %MW100
ATTENTION
7
The Modbus Settings specified above are used for this class. In a real plant, this can be different.
4/25/2012
14
Click OK.
15
Repeat step 15 and 18 for a redundant FEnet by selecting the B-side tab.
16
When finished, click OK on the Standard Settings dialog box.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
13
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure a MODBUS Server
14
Step
Action
17
From the menu bar of SoftMaster-NM, select Online Write Parameter to download the settings to the PLC.
18
You may encounter a warning message as shown below. Click Yes to continue.
19
Check the FEnet [base0, slot0] option.
20
Click OK.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure a MODBUS Server Step
Action
21
Wait for writing of the parameters to be completed.
22
In response to the following dialog box, click on OK.
23
From the SoftMaster-NM menu bar select Online Reset Reset Individual Module.
7
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
15
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure a MODBUS Server
16
Step
Action
24
Wait for the read process to complete.
25
Check the FEnet Settings and Click OK.
26
Wait for module to be reset.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure a MODBUS Server
Step 27
Action Open the Simulator by clicking on MDBUS.
ATTENTION If necessary, consult your instructor for help with this activity. MDBUS is an executable and must be present and running
In the Mdbus About window, click OK.
29
From the Mdbus Main menu bar click on Configuration.
7
28
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
17
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure a MODBUS Server
Step
Action
30
In the Mdbus Configuration window select Master for the Mode and Modbus Slave No.1. Enter the following in the Internet Protocol Communications section: IP Comm. Enable: enabled (checked) IP Addr.: IP address same as set for the MLPLC IP Modbus: RTU TCP Enter the following in the Database Points section Click OK
ATTENTION The Modbus Slave number should be the same as the HS Link Station number specified in FEnet Standard Settings. Note that Modbus Configuration page must have a Poll Delay specified. Poll Delay field cannot be blank. In lab we will keep the Poll Delay as 2.
18
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure a MODBUS Server
Step
Action
Verify the communication between MLPLC and Mdbus Simulator using Modbus TCP/IP server. Click on the Display menu on the Mdbus Main window and then click on Mdbus Coils, Mdbus Status, Mdbus Input Registers and Mdbus Holding Registers to open windows for observing the results.
32
Start the simulator by clicking the On menu item from the Mdbus Main window
7
31
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
19
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure a MODBUS Server
Step 33
Action Note the communication status.
ATTENTION If communication is established between the simulator and the MLPLC, then Comm. -Nrml will appear in the window. If there is no communication between the simulator and the MLPL, then Comm. -Fail will appear in the window. 34
20
From the Mdbus Main window menu click on Control to enter data to send to the MLPLC.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure a MODBUS Server Step
Action
35
Enter the Pt. No. 1 and Value(s) 1 in Coils and click on Send.
36
Enter Pt. No. 1 and Value(s) 222 in Holding Regs. and click on Send.
37
Observe the data in the Mdbus Coils and Mdbus Holding Regs. windows.
7
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
21
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure a MODBUS Server
Step 38
Action Next, we will observe the results in the Write Memory Area (%MX50) of the MLPLC. From the SoftMaster menu bar, select Monitor Address Monitoring.
22
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure a MODBUS Server
Step
Action
39
In the Address monitoring window, double click on M in the address tree and observe the value in %MX50 (Bit Write Area for the PLC).
ATTENTION To view values in bit format (%MX50) select 1 bit from the menu bar ViewView Options in the Address Monitoring window. To view values in hexadecimal format select
7
ViewView Options Hexadecimal from the menu bar in the Address Monitoring window.
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
23
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure a MODBUS Server
Step 40
Action Observe the value in %MW100 (Word Write Area for the PLC).
ATTENTION To view values in word format (%MW100) select 16 bit from the menu bar ViewView Options in the Address Monitoring window. To view values in decimal format select ViewView Options Unsigned Decimal from the menu bar in the Address Monitoring window.
24
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure a MODBUS Server
Step 41
Action Write data in the bit read area of MLPLC (%MX10).
ATTENTION To view memory addresses in bit format (%MX10) 1 bit from the select ViewView Options menu bar in the Address Monitoring window. To view values in hexadecimal format select
7
ViewView Options Hexadecimal from the menu bar in the Address Monitoring window.
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
25
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure a MODBUS Server
Step 42
Action Write data in the word read area of MLPLC (%MW10).
ATTENTION To view memory addresses in word format (%MW10) 16 bit from the select ViewView Options menu bar in the Address Monitoring window. To view values in decimal format select ViewView Options Unsigned Decimal from the menu bar in the Address Monitoring window.
26
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure a MODBUS Server
Step
Observe the values in the simulator Mdbus Status and Mdbus Input Registers.
7
43
Action
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
27
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure a MODBUS Server
This page was intentionally left blank.
28
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure a MODBUS Client
Configure a MODBUS Client Practice Objective The objective of this LAB is to demonstrate the communication between ML200R PLC and the Modbus simulator when ML200R PLC is configured as Modbus Client. Prerequisites •
SoftMaster is installed
•
ML200R controller is connected to the network
Introduction In this lab you will configure the ML200R as a MODBUS Client.
7
• The simulator is configured and used for demonstrating MODBUS communication with the ML200R.
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
29
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure a MODBUS Client
Partition Sheet
Item
Value to be Entered
FEnet Module A-side IP address FEnet Module B-side IP address FEnet Module A-side HS link Station No. Modbus Simulator Address
30
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure a MODBUS Client
Procedure
Step
Action
Configure MLPLC as Modbus Client Open SoftMaster from Start All Programs SoftMaster SoftMaster.
2
From the Project Menu in SoftMaster, select “New Project…”
7
1
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
31
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure a MODBUS Client
Step 3
Action On New Project Window, enter the Project Name as P2P Config. Leave other settings as default. Click OK.
32
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure a MODBUS Client
Step 4
Action From the SoftMaster menu bar select Tools Network Manager.
TIP Network Manager (SoftMaster-NM) is a separate tool within SoftMaster and is used for configuration of communication related information.
From the SoftMaster-NM menu bar select File Open from PLC…
7
5
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
33
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure a MODBUS Client
Step 6
34
Action In Online Settings, select USB as the connection type, and click Connect.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure a MODBUS Client
Step 7
Action Enter the Project name: P2P Settings Change the File directory to C:\SoftMaster\P2P Settings Leave the other settings to default and click OK.
7
ATTENTION Program name P2P Settings is used for this class. In a real plant setting, this can be the name of the plant or process it controls. The default path for the program is C:\SoftMaster\ . This path can be changed as required. The project file is saved with an .xfg extension. All communication settings are stored in this file.
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
35
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure a MODBUS Client
36
Step
Action
8
Wait for the parameters to be read from the PLC.
9
Double-click on the FEnet Module (in Base00) from Standard settings tab in the Project window.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure a MODBUS Client
Step
Set the IP address and HS link Station No for the A-side in TCP/IP settings.
7
10
Action
TIP Refer to your partition sheet at the start of the lab for the HS Link Station No and IP address.
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
37
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure a MODBUS Client
Step
Action
11
Set the IP Address and HS Station No. for the redundant FEnet by selecting the B-side tab.
12
Click OK.
13
Select the P2P tab from the Project window and double-click on P2P 01.
TIP The maximum number of P2P links is 08.
38
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure a MODBUS Client
Step 14
Action In the Communication Module Settings dialog box, select the following: Type: FEnet Base: 00 Slot: 00
TIP The settings specified above are specific to this class. Click OK.
16
From the P2P tab, double click on P2P Channel to open the block settings window.
7
15
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
39
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure a MODBUS Client
Step 17
Action In the P2P Channel Settings dialog box, select/enter the following: Channel: 0 P2P Driver: Modbus TCP Client Partner IP address: Enter the IP address of the Modbus Simulator (Refer to your partition sheet at the start of the lab)
ATTENTION Make sure that the windows firewall on PC is turned off or add the modbus.exe to firewall exceptions list.
40
18
Click OK.
19
In the P2P tab, double click on P2P Block.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure a MODBUS Client
Step 20
Action In the P2P Block Setting dialog box, set the parameters for the BIT data type as shown: P2P function
Trigger flag
Command type
Data type
Data size
READ
_T1S
Single
BIT
-
WRITE
_T1S
Single
BIT
-
READ
_T1S
Continuous
WORD
16
WRITE
_T1S
Continuous
WORD
16
TIP Note that a valid Dst St and Dst St # must be entered. The Dst St # is the Modbus Slave Number. In the P2P Block Settings dialog box, click on Setting for the P2P function READ and Data type BIT.
7
21
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
41
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure a MODBUS Client
42
Step
Action
22
In the Variable Setting dialog box, enter the Write area as %MX10 and click OK.
23
In the P2P Block Settings dialog box, click on Setting for the P2P function WRITE and Data type BIT.
24
In the Variable Settings dialog box, enter the Read area as %MX11 and click OK.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure a MODBUS Client Step
Action
25
In the P2P Block Settings dialog box, click on Setting for the P2P function READ and Data type WORD.
26
In the Variable Settings dialog box, enter the Write area as %MW100 and click OK.
27
In the P2P Block Settings dialog box, click on Setting for the P2P function WRITE and Data type WORD.
7
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
43
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure a MODBUS Client
44
Step
Action
28
In the Variable Settings dialog box, enter the Read area as %MW200 and click OK.
29
From the menu bar of SoftMaster-NM, select Online Write Parameter to download the settings.
30
You will encounter a warning message as shown below. Click Yes to continue.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure a MODBUS Client Step
Action
31
In the Write parameters dialog box, select P2P 01.
32
Click OK.
33
Wait for writing of the parameters to complete.
34
From the menu bar of SoftMaster-NM select Online Enable Link (HS Link, P2P) to download the settings.
7
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
45
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure a MODBUS Client
Step
Action
35
Enable Link dialog box appears. Select the P2P01 checkbox and click Write.
36
Acknowledge the SoftMaster-NM dialog Box and click OK.
Close Enable Link dialog box.
46
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure a MODBUS Client
Step 37
Action Close SoftMaster-NM.
Verify the communication between MLPLC and Mdbus Simulator using Modbus TCP Client 38
Open the Simulator by double clicking on MDBUS.exe
TIP
4/25/2012
39
In the Mdbus About dialog box, click OK.
40
To configure parameters, click Configuration on the main menu.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
7
Right-click MDBUS.exe and select Run As Administrator
47
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure a MODBUS Client
Step 41
Action Select the Mode as Slave and the Modbus Slave No. Modbus Slave No. must be the same as that of the HS Link Station No.
ATTENTION The Modbus Slave No. should be the same as the HS Link Station No. specified in the FEnet Module Configuration. 42
Select the IP Comm. Enable option and Internet Protocol as RTU TCP.
43
In Database Points, set the Number of Coils and Status as 10. Enter Input Registers and Holding Registers as 16.
48
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure a MODBUS Client Step
Action
44
Click OK.
45
To start the Simulator, click On in the menu bar.
46
Observe the communication status.
47
Select Monitor Address Monitoring from the SoftMaster menu bar.
7
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
49
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure a MODBUS Client
Step 48
Action Enter data (1) in bit read area (%MX11) of the MLPLC.
ATTENTION To view memory addresses in bit format (%MX11) 1 bit from the select ViewView Options menu bar in the Address Monitoring window. To view the values in hexadecimal format select ViewView Options Hexadecimal from the menu bar in the Address Monitoring window. 49
50
In the Simulator menu bar, select Displays Coils.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure a MODBUS Client
Step
Action
50
Ensure the data (1) from the ML PLC is present in address 00001 of the Simulator.
51
Enter data (66) in the WORD read area (%MW200) of MLPLC.
ATTENTION To view memory addresses in word format (%MW200) 16 bit from the select ViewView Options menu bar in the Address Monitoring window. To view the values in decimal format select
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
7
ViewView Options Unsigned Decimal from the menu bar in the Address Monitoring window.
51
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure a MODBUS Client
52
Step
Action
52
In the Simulator menu bar, select Displays Holding Regs.
53
Ensure that the data (66) from the ML PLC is present in register 00001 of the simulator.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure the High Speed Link
Configure the High Speed Link Practice Objective The objective of this lab is to establish a communication between two MasterLogic200R (ML200R) Controllers using a high speed link. Prerequisites •
SoftMaster (MasterLogic programming software) is installed and configured.
•
Two ML200R controllers are available and connected to the network.
•
Network connections are established for both ML200R controllers.
Introduction In this lab you will perform the following: •
SoftMaster is the ML200R Programming Software
SoftMaster-NM is used to configure communication related parameters
Change the data in the Write area of PLC1 and check whether it appears in the Read area of PLC2 and vice versa.
7
•
Configure both PLCs using SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM (Network Manager)
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
53
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure the High Speed Link
Partition Sheet Item
Value to be Entered
FEnet Module A-side IP Address FEnet Module A-side HS link Station no. Peer controller (PLC2) FEnet Module Aside IP Address Peer controller (PLC2) FEnet Module Aside HS link Station no.
54
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure the High Speed Link
Procedures
Step
Action
Configure communication settings for High Speed Link 1 ATTENTION This lab is performed on Physical Hardware. Students must perform this lab sequentially (one at a time). Check with the instructor and ensure that the controller is free before performing this lab.
Open SoftMaster from Start Programs SoftMaster SoftMaster.
7
2
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
55
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure the High Speed Link
Step 3
Action From the Project Menu in SoftMaster, select “New Project…”.
TIP Open from PLC will upload the project information from the PLC along with the hardware details. Open Project will open a previously configured project in the offline mode. New Project will create a new project in the offline mode.
56
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure the High Speed Link
Step 4
Action In New Project Window, enter Project name as High Speed Link Config. Leave the other entries as default.
7
Click OK.
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
57
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure the High Speed Link
Step 5
Action From the SoftMaster menu bar select Tools Network Manager.
TIP Network Manager (SoftMaster-NM) is a separate tool within SoftMaster and is used for configuration of communication related information.
6
58
Using the SoftMaster-NM menu bar, select File Open from PLC…
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure the High Speed Link
Step 7
Action In Online Settings, select USB as the connection type, and click Connect.
ATTENTION Connection type can be USB, extended base USB or RS-232C with depth local. If the connection type selected is RS-232C, then click the Settings tab and select the COM Port used and enter the baud rate.
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
7
Ethernet connections cannot be used because FEnet Module is not yet configured.
59
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure the High Speed Link
Step 8
Action Enter the Project name and select the path for the File Directory as shown below. Click OK when finished.
ATTENTION The Program name FEnet Settings is used for our class. In a real plant scenario, this could be the name of the plant or process it controls. The default path for the program will be C:\SoftMaster\. This path can be changed as required. This project’s filename is saved with an .xfg extension. All communication settings are stored in this file.
60
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure the High Speed Link Step
Action
9
Wait for the parameters to be read from the PLC.
10
Double-click on FEnet in the Project window to configure properties for the FEnet module.
7
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
61
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure the High Speed Link
Step 11
Action Set the IP address and HS link Station No for the A-side in TCP/IP Settings.
TIP Refer to your partition sheet at the start of the lab for the HS Link Station Number and IP address.
62
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure the High Speed Link
Step
Action
12
Set the IP Address and HS Station No. for the redundant FEnet by selecting the B-side tab.
13
Click OK when finished.
14
Select the High-speed Link tab from the Project Window and double-click on Highspeed Link 01.
TIP
7
The maximum number of high-speed links is 12.
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
63
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure the High Speed Link
Step 15
Action In the Communication Module Settings window, select the following: Module type: FEnet Base # : 00 Slot # : 00 Period type: 20msec Leave all other parameters to the default values.
TIP The settings specified above are specific to this class.
16
64
Click OK.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure the High Speed Link
Step
Action
17
Double-click on Block from the High-speed Link Tab in the Project Window to open the Block Settings Window.
18
In this example MLPLC1 is going to send/receive data to/from Peer PLC2. Enter the following settings for MLPLC1. 1. For Send Mode: Station type: Master Mode: Send Block:1 Read Area: %MW100 Read Area word size: 12 2. For Receive Mode: Station type: Master Mode: Receive Station #: 2 (Peer PLC Station No.) Block:1 Write Area: %MW200
7
Write Area word size: 12
TIP The settings specified are specific to this class. The number of data blocks can be 0 to 31. The Read/ Write area word size can be 0 to 200.
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
65
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure the High Speed Link
66
Step
Action
19
From the menu bar of SoftMaster-NM, select Online Write Parameter to download the settings.
20
Click yes on a SoftMaster-NM window and acknowledge the message as shown below.
21
Select the checkbox shown for the Standard Settings and High-speed Link.
22
Click OK.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure the High Speed Link Step
Action
23
Wait for the PLC to complete writing the parameters.
24
Click OK in response to the SoftMaster-NM dialog box.
25
From the SoftMaster-NM menu bar select Online Reset Reset Individual Module.
7
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
67
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure the High Speed Link
Step
Action
26
Wait until reading module information is complete.
27
Select the FEnet Settings checkboxes for Individual module reset and Click OK.
28
Wait for the module reset to be complete.
TIP If you have connected to the PLC using the same FENet module and there is no other communication module present in the Base, the individual module reset operation fails and a dialog box called “Selected item does not exist” appears. In this case, in SoftMaster-NM menu, click Online Reset ResetPLC. This will reset the PLC. Reconnect to the PLC in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM window.
68
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure the High Speed Link Step
Action
29
From the SoftMaster-NM menu bar select Online Enable Link.
30
Select the High-speed Link 01 and click Write.
7
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
69
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure the High Speed Link
70
Step
Action
31
Click OK in response to the SoftMasterNM dialog box.
32
Click Close in the Enable Link Window.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure the High Speed Link
Step 33
Action Repeat steps 1 to 34 for peer PLC2. TIP Refer to the Partition sheet at the start of the lab for IP Address and HS Station No for peer PLC2.
Verify the communication between the two PLCs using High Speed Link From the SoftMaster menu bar, select Monitor Address Monitoring.
7
34
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
71
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure the High Speed Link
Step 35
Action Double-click on M in the address tree in the Address Monitoring window and write the data “0333” in %MW100 (Read Area for PLC1).
ATTENTION To view memory addresses in word format (%MW100) 16 bit from the select ViewView Options menu bar in the Address Monitoring window. To view the values in hexadecimal format select ViewView Options Hexadecimal from the menu bar in the Address Monitoring window.
72
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure the High Speed Link
Step
Action
36
Observe the data “0333” being written in the write area (%MW200) in Peer PLC2.
37
Write the data “0222” in the Read area (%MW100) of Peer PLC2.
38
Observe the data “0222” being written in the Write area (%MW200) of PLC1.
ATTENTION To view memory addresses in word format (%MW100) 16 bit from the select ViewView Options menu bar in the Address Monitoring window. To view values in hexadecimal format select
7
ViewView Options Hexadecimal from the menu bar in the Address Monitoring window.
4/25/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
73
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic Configure the High Speed Link
This page was intentionally left blank.
74
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/25/2012
Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
1
Honeywell
Introduction •
Online functions are the operations which can be done after establishing a connection with the PLC The following are online functions: – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Change Mode of PLC Read from PLC Write to PLC Compare with PLC Flash Memory Setting Control Redundancy Reset PLC Clearing PLC data PLC Information PLC History PLC Error/Warning I/O Information Force I/O Setting Skip I/O Setting Fault Mask Module Changing Wizard Base Changing Wizard Online Editing
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
8
•
Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
2
1
Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Online Functions • Change Mode
– Used to change the operation mode of the PLC – While performing mode changes from SoftMaster, ensure that the PLC’s key switch is in REMOTE (REM) mode – Can be used only when the Program in the PLC is the same program in the current project in SoftMaster
• Read
– Used to transfer user programs, parameters, and comments from the PLC to the current project in SoftMaster
• Write
– Used to transfer user programs, parameters, and comments from the current project in SoftMaster to the PLC
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
3
Online Functions - Compare with PLC
Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
• Used to compare the project in the PLC with the project currently open in SoftMaster – Comparison results are displayed in the Results tab of the Message Window
Select the parameters to be compared and click Compare
Project in PLC
Comparison results
Current project open in SoftMaster
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4
2
Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Online Functions - Flash Memory Settings
• When the operation mode of the PLC is changed to RUN, the PLC copies the program to flash memory as a backup
When selected, the program is copied to flash memory after download or online editing. Also, the program can be recovered from flash memory if the program memory becomes corrupted.
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
When selected, the program is not copied to flash memory after download or online editing.
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
5
Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Online Functions - Control Redundancy • Allows switchover between the Redundant CPUs • Standby CPU mode
8
– If the PLC is in the RUN mode, then the STOP option is selected by default. When the Change button is selected, the mode of the PLC changes to STOP. – If the PLC is in the STOP mode, then the RUN option is selected by default. When the Change button is selected, the mode of the PLC changes to RUN.
Select Change to switchover to the standby CPU
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Used to Reset Standby CPU Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
6
3
Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Online Functions - Reset PLC • Used to reset the PLC – The PLC is turned OFF and turned ON again
Deletes all error/warning information
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Deletes error/warning information, latch area data, skip I/O settings, error mask and forced I/O settings
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
7
Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Online Functions - Clear PLC
• Clears user programs, parameters, comments, memory and latch area in the PLC
Selects All
Deselects All
Select items to clear
Select the individual memory locations to be cleared
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
8
4
Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Online Functions - PLC Information • Used to view information regarding the connected PLC • Displays CPU Information
Details of CPU
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
9
Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Online Functions - PLC Information • CPU Performance
Displays the scan time of the connected PLC
Shows the details of programs downloaded to PLC and their memory consumption
8
Memory used by programs
Memory used by comments
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
10
5
Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Online Functions - PLC Information • PLCRTC
• Password
– Used to set the real time clock (RTC) of the PLC – Users can specify the time or the PLC can be synchronized with the PC clock
– Users can password-protect PLC information – Remember or document the password entered
If multiple SoftMaster instances are connected to the PLC, only the first SoftMaster instance can synchronize the PLC with the PC clock
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
11
Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Online Functions - PLC History
• Displays the history of errors/warnings, mode changes, shutdown log
Displays Error log
Reads PLC History Deletes PLC History
Displays details of the selected error and a remedy to correct it
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Saves PLC History to a .csv file Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
12
6
Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Online Functions - PLC History
Displays the base number where the power shutdown occurred
Mode Change Log of the PLC
Shut down Log
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
13
Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Online Functions - PLC History • System Log – Displays the history of tasks run by SoftMaster
• By default, 100 log entries are shown
8
– Select ‘Read All’ to view more entries
If the number of items is less than 100, this option is disabled.
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
14
7
Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Online Functions - PLC Error/Warning • Displays Error/Warnings and Error Logs in the PLC
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
15
Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Online Functions - I/O Information
• View the details of I/O Modules • Used to synchronize the parameters of I/O Modules to that of the I/O parameters in the SoftMaster project
Activated only when the PLC is in the STOP mode
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
16
8
Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Online Functions - Forced I/O Setup • Forced I/O Setup – Enables forcing of I/Os and sets the value of the forced I/O To select the module, specify the Base and Slot number
Used to enable or disable the force I/O functionality
Click to select the channel Click to Change the value to 1
Flag : Used to select the channel to be forced: Channel not selected Channel selected Data: Value which is forced to the channel. It can be either 1 or 0 Channel value is 0 Channel value is 1
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
17
Online Functions - Forced I/O Settings
Used to pass the forced values to the field devices
Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Used to clear the forced values applied to the field devices
To clear all Forced IO together
Displays addresses that have been forced
Displays the variable names for the addresses
To clear force applied on selected registers
• In ‘Program Monitoring’, forced input values are displayed but forced output values are not displayed Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
18
9
Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
8
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell
Forced IO Behavior • Scenario 1:
– Force Output: Enabled – Force functionality for IO channel: Enabled ( ) • Forced value applied for particular channel is passed to the field
• Scenario 2: – Forced Output: Disabled – Force functionality for IO channel: Enabled ( ) • Forced value applied to the field device is removed • Configured force value in the Force I/O Setup window must be cleared manually using the Delete or Delete All option Enable or disable Force functionality for Output modules
Enable or disable Force functionality for IO channel
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Configure Forced IO Value Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
19
Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Forced IO Behavior
• Force IO functionality is enabled and some IO values are forced • When the PLC is restarted (Power Off and Power On) – Forced IO values do not get cleared – Restart of the PLC only performs Reset operation
• To remove all the forced IO values, user need to perform Overall Reset
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
20
10
Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Forced IO Behavior • Scenario 1:
Value of these two addresses are forced
Forced Input is enabled
• Restart of PLC after executing reset function Force IO do not get cleared – Forced IO values on field get cleared – Forced IO values in the software remain as it is
• To reset both user need to execute the Overall Reset function
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
21
Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Online Functions - Skip I/O Settings
• Used to enable/disable I/O Slots during PLC operation • The PLC stops communicating with the Base or Slots that have been selected for skipping.
Select to skip the complete Base
8
Select to skip particular slots in the Base
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
22
11
Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Online Functions - Fault Mask
• Configured to run the program even though a module is in Fault condition during the PLC Operation – Enables uninterrupted program execution, even in case of errors in the module
Select to Fault Mask the complete Base Select to Fault Mask particular slots in the Base
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
23
Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Online Functions - Module Changing Wizard • Used to change a module when the PLC is in the RUN mode • Open the Module Changing Wizard in SoftMaster
Select the module to be changed and click Next
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
24
12
Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Online Functions - Module Changing Wizard • Detailed information for the selected module is displayed
Review the Module details. Select the Module Name and click Next.
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
25
Online Functions - Module Changing Wizard
Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
8
• In the Removing Module dialog box, click Next after removing the module
Remove the Module and click Next Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
26
13
Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Online Functions - Module Changing Wizard
• Insert the new module and click Next on the Installing New Module dialog box • Once the installation of the new module is complete, click Finish to close the wizard
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
27
Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Online Functions - Base Changing Wizard
• Used to change a faulty Base when the PLC is in the RUN mode • Changing a Base is similar to the Module change procedure
Details of the Base are displayed
Select the Base to be changed and click Next.
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
28
14
Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Online Functions - Online Editing • Start Online Editing
– Used to edit a program when the PLC is in the RUN mode – From the menu bar in SoftMaster, click Project Open from PLC to open the Project – Click Start Online Editing to start editing the program
• Write Modified Program – Writes the changed program to the PLC
• Stop Online Editing – Used to end the online editing session
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
29
Project open in Online Editing Mode
Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
8
This page intentionally left blank
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
30
15
Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Describe Various Online Functionalities in NM
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
31
Describe Various Online Functionalities in NM 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
• SoftMaster-NM is used to configure and monitor communication modules • Online Functionalities: – – – – – – – –
Read I/O Information Write Parameter Read parameter Delete parameter Enable link Upload/Download (File) System Diagnostic Reset
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
32
16
Describe Various Online Functionalities in NM 2/2/2012
Online Functions - Read I/O Information
Honeywell
• Reads information of Communication Interface Modules and I/O modules from the Base (ML200R PLC) – Select Online Read IO Information
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
33
Configure Communication Interface Modules
Describe Various Online Functionalities in NM 2/2/2012
Honeywell
• Double click on a Communication Interface Module to view and configure its details – Detailed I/O module information cannot be viewed from SoftMaster-NM
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
8
Details of FEnet module
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
34
17
Describe Various Online Functionalities in NM 2/2/2012
Online Functions - Write Parameter and Read Parameter
Honeywell
• Write parameter – Writes configuration of interface modules to the PLC
• Read Parameter – Reads configuration of interface modules from the PLC – On complete, it populates the information in the Project Window of SoftMaster-NM
Select the modules to Write the configuration to the PLC Select the modules to Read the configuration from the PLC Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
35
Describe Various Online Functionalities in NM 2/2/2012
Online Functions - Delete Parameter and Enable link
Honeywell
• Delete parameter – Deletes configuration information from the PLC and updates the SoftMasterNM Project Window
• Enable Link – Enable P2P and High Speed links on successful download of the configuration into the PLC
Select the interface modules to Delete the configuration from the PLC
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Select the links to be Enabled
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
36
18
Describe Various Online Functionalities in NM 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Online Functions - Download/Upload • Upgrades firmware of the Communication Interface Modules • Two types of upgrade files: – OS - Firmware information file – BBM - Boot version file
• Select the BBM file and click the BBMBoot button
Select the interface modules to be upgraded
Select the file type
– Reset PLC
• Select the OS file and click the Download button
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
37
Describe Various Online Functionalities in NM 2/2/2012
Online Functions - Reset PLC/Reset Individual Module
Honeywell
• Reset PLC – On completion of a ‘Write’ operation to the PLC, reset the PLC
• Reset Individual module
8
– When basic parameters of the modules are changed from the Standard Settings tab, reset the individual modules
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
38
19
Describe Various Online Functionalities in NM 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Online Functions - System Diagnostics
• View information for the CPU, Communication Interface Modules, and Network status of the PLC – Click the down arrow key inside the System Diagnostics window to view information for other bases
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
39
Describe Various Online Functionalities in NM 2/2/2012
Online Functions - System Diagnostics of CPU and Base Right click on the module and select ‘CPU Module Information’
Honeywell Right click on the module and select ‘Module Information’
General information for the Base General information for the CPU Module Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
40
20
Describe Various Online Functionalities in NM 2/2/2012
Honeywell
System Diagnostics of FEnet Module
• Right click on the FEnet module to view the System Diagnostic Menu
Displays the statistics of packets received through the media
Information about the communication media Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
41
Describe Various Online Functionalities in NM 2/2/2012
Online Functions - System Diagnostics of FEnet Module • Status by service
Honeywell
– FEnet module can be configured with Dedicated, P2P and HS Link Services
8
Status of the services can be viewed from the ‘Status by Service’ window
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
42
21
Describe Various Online Functionalities in NM 2/2/2012
Online Functions - System Diagnostics of FEnet Module
Honeywell
• Ping Test – To verify status of the communication link between an FEnet I/F module and other stations on the network
Status of the communication with a computer Other station’s IP address
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
43
Describe Various Online Functionalities in NM 2/2/2012
Online Functions - System Diagnostics of FEnet Module
Honeywell
• Auto Scan – Scans and displays the Link Interface Status of the whole network – Shows all FEnet addresses except your own
Scanned the redundant partner in the system
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
44
22
Describe Various Online Functionalities in NM 2/2/2012
Online Functions - System Diagnostics of Snet Module
Honeywell
• Right click on the Snet module to view the System Diagnostic Menu
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
45
Describe Various Online Functionalities in NM 2/2/2012
Online Functions - System Diagnostics of Snet Module
Honeywell
• Frame Monitor
8
– Used to check frames of exchanged data between the Snet I/F module and an external communication device
Displays frames: Transmit and Receive
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
46
23
Describe Various Online Functionalities in NM 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Online Functions - System Diagnostics of Snet Module • Loop Back Test
– Used to check the normal operation of the port without connecting Snet to an external I/F module
Select the channel to be tested Status of the Loop Back Test
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
47
Describe Various Online Functionalities in NM 2/2/2012
Online Functions - System Diagnostics of Snet Module
Honeywell
• Status By Service – Snet Module can be configured with Dedicated Service and P2P Service
Status of the services can be viewed in the ‘Status by service’ window
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
48
24
Describe Various Online Functionalities in NM 2/2/2012
Online Functions - System Diagnostics of Snet Module Displays the number of times Dedicated Service communication occurred
Honeywell
Displays the number of times errors occurred during Dedicated Service communication
Displays Channel number
Displays P2P downloaded parameters
Displays P2P Block numbers Checks P2P Service status every 1 sec
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
49
Describe Various Online Functionalities in NM 2/2/2012
Honeywell
8
This page intentionally left blank
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
50
25
Describe Various Online Functionalities in NM 2/2/2012
Describe Various Monitoring Options in SoftMaster
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
51
Describe Various Monitoring Options in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
• Monitoring Functions are functions which can be performed once the SoftMaster is online with PLC and monitoring is ON • Following are the Monitoring Functions – – – – – – – – – – – –
Start/Stop monitoring Pause/Resume monitoring Pausing condition Change current value System monitoring Address monitoring Special Module monitoring Trend Monitoring PID monitoring SOE Monitoring Custom Events Data Traces
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
52
26
Describe Various Monitoring Options in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Monitoring Functions • Start/Stop Monitoring
– Done through the Monitor tab on the menu or by using the buttons on the toolbar
• Pause/Resume Monitoring – Done through the Monitor tab on the menu or by using the buttons on the toolbar
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
53
Describe Various Monitoring Options in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Monitoring Functions – Pausing Condition
• Used to pause the monitoring when specified condition on the particular address is met • Maximum 10 conditions can be configured as pausing conditions
Select the program in which the variable having pausing condition exists
8
Finds the variable in the program to use it for pausing condition
Select the variable for which pausing condition is to be configured
Select the set value for the condition Set the condition (=, >, =, and Samples after trigger • Used when samples are required before trigger condition – Total samples = Samples after trigger • Used when samples are required after trigger condition – Samples after trigger = 0 • Used when samples after trigger are not required
Frequency at which data has to be collected
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
84
42
Describe Various Monitoring Options in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Monitoring Functions – Data Trace • Right click on trend and select Graph Settings or select Graph Graph Settings from the menu bar • Graph Settings – Show grid • Displays grid on the screen when selected – Show trigger • Trigger position is shown on graph – Bit graph legend and Word graph legend • Specifies position of bit graph index and word graph index – Color setup • Specifies the Bit graph/Word graph color Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
85
Honeywell
Monitoring Functions – Data Trace •
Describe Various Monitoring Options in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Animation – Displays the trace data in chronological order – The scroll speed of animation can be set in animation settings
•
Write Trace Setting – Writes the configured trace setting to PLC
•
Read Trace Setting
•
Read Trace Data
8
– Reads trace setting from PLC – Read trace data from PLC and displays on screen
•
Delete Trace Data – Deletes the trace data from PLC
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
86
43
Describe Various Monitoring Options in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Monitoring Functions – Data Trace • Go to Trigger Position – Moves the trigger to its generated point of time
• Trace data – Displays the trace data values
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
87
Describe Various Monitoring Options in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
This page intentionally left blank
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
88
44
Describe Various Monitoring Options in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Describe Various Debugging Options in SoftMaster
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
89
Describe Various Debugging Options in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Introduction •
Debugging is a function by which the user can trace the program as a step unit
•
Debugging a program has the following implications
– In a Ladder logic, the rung is the step unit – Rung can be traced or evaluated by applying breakpoints in the debugger
– Debugging function is available only for a non-redundant ML200 PLC configuration – ML200R Simulator supports debugging • The simulator allows debugging when a PLC is unavailable
8
– Debugging function is available only with the PLC in online mode • Debug is not available if PLC operation is in Run mode – Debug function is available only when the program in SoftMaster and program in PLC are identical – If an error occurs in the PLC, the debugging is stopped • User has to clear the error to run the debug operation
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
90
45
Describe Various Debugging Options in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Debugging Activities •
Debugging a program comprises of the following activities
– Go • RUN the complete program under debugger control – Go to Cursor • RUN the program up to a cursor position in a selected step – Step Into • RUN a single step of a program – Step Out • Step out of the current single stepped function or sub-routine – For a non-subroutine block, the program will execute the next step – Step Over • RUN the program to next step – Ignore and do not execute the next subroutine block and run the program to the next step – Set/Remove Breakpoints • Breakpoints evaluate a step – Breakpoints List • Lists the Breakpoints in the current Program – Setting Breakpoint condition • Program breakpoints can be set based on a variable value/scan condition.
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
91
Describe Various Debugging Options in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Debug – Function access • Debug operations are available on the Debug Toolbar
– Debug menu lists all of the operations with their respective keyboard shortcuts
Set Breakpoint Conditions
Go or Run
List the Breakpoints
Step Over
Set/Remove Breakpoints
Step Into
Go to cursor selected step
Step Out
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
92
46
Describe Various Debugging Options in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Debug - Breakpoints A breakpoint can be set as follows:
A set breakpoint
– Place the cursor on a Rung or program branch – Select the (Set Breakpoint) button from the Debug Toolbar
•
Breakpoint can be removed as follows: – Place the cursor on the breakpoint – Select the (Set Breakpoint) button from the Debug Toolbar
•
Program stops at the breakpoint when the program is in the DEBUG mode
•
Step Into / Step Out / Step Over is used after the program is stopped
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
A breakpoint that has stopped the program
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
93
Describe Various Debugging Options in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Debug – Step Into, Step Over and Step Out •
Step Into function: – – – –
•
Useful when Breakpoint is engaged during debugging. Enters the program into the next step. If current step is an application CALL to Subroutine, it will Step Into the Subroutine. Accessible through DebugStep Into menu.
Step Over function: – Useful when Breakpoint is engaged during debugging. – Enters the program into the next step. – If current step is an application CALL to Subroutine, it will Step Over the Subroutine and enter the next step. – Accessible through Debug Step Over menu.
•
Step Out function: – Useful when Breakpoint is engaged during debugging. – Used to exit a subroutine which has been entered into using Step Into. – Accessible through Debug Step Out menu.
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
94
47
Describe Various Debugging Options in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
8
•
Honeywell
Debug – Go to cursor •
The Go to cursor function is used to stop a program at a cursor selected location – The Go to cursor does not use breakpoints
•
Program stopped at cursor location
A Go to cursor can be set as follows: – Place the cursor on a Rung or program branch – Select the (Go to cursor) button from the Debug Toolbar
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
95
Describe Various Debugging Options in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Debug – Breakpoint Conditions
• A Breakpoint condition is a conditional debug statement in the program • The Breakpoint condition can be a Variable Breakpoint or Scan Breakpoint – Variable Breakpoint can be used in all the data types supported by ML200
Invoke Variable selection dialog box
Enable Variable breakpoints
Variable and program name selection Value of the variable which enforces a program break
Variable information
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
96
48
Describe Various Debugging Options in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Debug – Variable Break • The variable is selected from the existing Local Variables list • Condition
– Breaks the program after read or write operation from the address
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
97
Describe Various Debugging Options in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Debug – Scan Breakpoint
• Scan Breakpoint function applies the breakpoint to program after the specified number of scan count
8
– For a scan count of 6, the debugger allows the user to change the value of variable 6 times – After the count of 6, the program is stopped
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
98
49
Describe Various Debugging Options in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Debug – Breakpoints List
• Breakpoints List shows a list of breakpoints being used in the program – Accessible through Debug Breakpoint List
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
99
Describe Various Debugging Options in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Debug - Precautions • Basic Parameter option - Output during debugging
– When selected, the program sends the data to the output module in debugging mode
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
100
50
Describe Various Debugging Options in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Debug - Precautions • A Redundant ML200R CPU will not support debugging – Only a non-redundant ML200 CPU will support debugging
• Maximum 62 Breakpoints can be set in the PLC • PLC Operation switch should be in REM mode • The PLC should be online – The PLC should not be in RUN mode
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
101
Describe Various Debugging Options in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
Honeywell
8
This page intentionally left blank
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
102
51
Describe Various Debugging Options in SoftMaster 2/2/2012
This page was intentionally left blank.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
Describe Software Required for Experion Integration
Experion Integration
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
1
Describe Software Required for Experion Integration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Introduction •
MasterLogic Dedicated Protocol (MLDP) is used to integrate the ML200R PLC with Experion PKS
•
Experion integration gains special access to elaborate areas of the MasterLogic PLC through MLDP Direct Variables %R file Register Variables CPU, I/O Module, Communication Status and Alarm Flags Real Time Clock (RTC) Area I/O Configuration Parameters PLC History Logs DISOE Module Integration
9
– – – – – – –
Experion Integration
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
2
1
Describe Software Required for Experion Integration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Integration Requirements •
Integration solution –
– –
•
Hardware/software required for MasterLogic PLC - Experion integration – –
– –
•
Integrate MasterLogic PLC with Experion • Integration of MasterLogic with Experion PKS R311 and R400 is available as a project special option • Integration of MasterLogic with Experion HS and LS is available as a standard product Enable Experion to read/write data to MasterLogic PLC Monitor PLC alarms and events on Experion Stations • Achieved by connecting the PLC to an Experion server through Ethernet and mapping PLC data items to standard Experion points
MasterLogic PLC MasterLogic Server 1.2.0.1 • Can be used with EPKS R311 and R400 For HS/LS ML Server software is integrated with the product Experion PKS Server • Experion R311 or R400
Tools required for MasterLogic PLC - Experion integration – – –
SoftMaster Quick Builder Experion Station
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Experion Integration
3
Describe Software Required for Experion Integration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Integration Architecture
Experion Server MasterLogic Server Configuration Tool
ML200R PLC Experion Integration
MasterLogic Server
Quick Builder (ML PLC Channel/Controller)
ML200R PLC Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4
2
ML200R PLC Describe Software Required for Experion Integration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Integration Elements • SoftMaster is used for: – Monitoring the PLC status and data values – Monitoring and forcing the I/O addresses – Creating and monitoring programs as a part of plant control
• Quick Builder is used for: – Configuring MasterLogic Channels, MasterLogic Controllers, Analog and Status points – Uploading/downloading Channels, Controllers and Points from/to the Experion Server
• Experion Station is used for: – Monitoring the online status of ML200R PLC integrated with Experion – Changing the online status of MasterLogic controllers and MasterLogic channels – Viewing point values obtained from Experion on custom graphics Experion Integration
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
5
Describe Software Required for Experion Integration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Integration Elements (Continued) • MasterLogic PLC
– Replaces necessary sequential relay circuits for machine control – Used in any application that needs some type of electrical control – Executes the program and changes the output state based on varying input conditions
• MasterLogic Server – – – –
Starts communication with PLCs Reads PLC information and writes to the Experion server Writes values from the Experion server to PLCs Transfers system status, IO module information, alarms/events and SOE of PLCs associated to an Experion Server
• Experion Server
9
– MasterLogic Server is loaded on the Experion Server to communicate with MasterLogic PLCs – Contains tools like Quick Builder and Experion Station
Experion Integration
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
6
3
Describe Software Required for Experion Integration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Installation Prerequisites • Prerequisites for installation of MasterLogic Server: – Experion Server with an OPC Client license must be present – MS-XML version 6 must be installed – Administrator access to Experion Server
• If MasterLogic Server is installed on a node which is not an Experion Server / Client, then an error occurs and installation is aborted
Experion Integration
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
7
Describe Software Required for Experion Integration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Install MasterLogic Server
• To install MasterLogic Server, run the ‘setup.exe’ file from the ML Server installation CD and follow the prompts • Refer to the ‘MasterLogic-Experion PKS Integration User's Guide on the CD for more details
Experion Integration
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
8
4
Describe Software Required for Experion Integration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
MasterLogic Files Copied
• When ML Server installation is complete, the following files are copied: – ML200R PLC graphics and .xml files are copied to C:\ProgramData\Honeywell\Experion PKS\Client\Abstract – ML200R PLC .xml, .exe, .dll files are copied to C:\ Program Files\ Honeywell\ MasterLogicServer
Experion Integration
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
9
Describe Software Required for Experion Integration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
MasterLogic Files Copied To Abstract Folder • Files copied to the Abstract folder
XML files
9
Graphics Page (.htm), xml and xsd files
Experion Integration
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
10
5
Describe Software Required for Experion Integration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
MasterLogic Files Copied • Files copied to the MasterLogicServer folder
Experion Integration
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
11
Install MasterLogic Server on Client Machine
Describe Software Required for Experion Integration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
• Installation of MasterLogic Server in Experion Client machines installs only Quick Builder components – MasterLogic component is added to the component manager – Allows configuration of MasterLogic Channel, Controller, and Points in Quick builder from client machines
Quick Builder components created as a part of installation
Experion Integration
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
12
6
Describe Software Required for Experion Integration 2/2/2012
Difference between ML Server on Experion PKS and LS
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Experion Integration
13
Difference between ML Server on Experion PKS and LS 2/2/2012
Honeywell
MasterLogic Server for Experion
• Differences between the ML Server for Experion PKS and Experion HS/LS ML Server Experion PKS
Item License Operating System (on which ML Server is installed)
ML Server Experion HS/LS
Separate license is required
Available as standard product. Separate license is not required
Windows 2008 Server / Windows 7
Windows 7
9
Error message which occurs when ML Server is executed on unsupported OS
Experion Integration
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
14
7
Difference between ML Server on Experion PKS and LS 2/2/2012
Describe ML Server Software Licensing with EXP PKS
Experion Integration
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
15
Describe ML Server Software Licensing with EXP PKS 2/2/2012
Honeywell
License Features • MasterLogic Server license features include:
– Number of PLCs • With demo version Maximum number of MLPLC supported per MasterLogic server is 10 • If the license supports 10 PLCs, then the ML server communicates with a maximum of 10 PLCs – Number of PLC points that can be used across all PLCs • Maximum number of points supported per MasterLogic server is 8050 • If the license supports 1000 PLC points then a maximum of 1000 PLC points can be used for data communication across all PLCs
Experion Integration
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
16
8
Describe ML Server Software Licensing with EXP PKS 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Obtain a License • Obtaining a new license via e-mail
– Ensure that the Voucher ID provided by Honeywell is present – Create Host ID files by opening the ML Server License Registration Application – Send an e-mail to:
[email protected] with following details • On the subject line, type the voucher ID as: VOUCHID: • Attach the Host ID files: < Computer name>.zip and .HID files
The subject line is case sensitive. Other than the subject line and attachments, do not include any other information.
Experion Integration
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
17
Describe ML Server Software Licensing with EXP PKS 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Install License • The license is sent from Honeywell in a zip file – Unzip the file using the password ‘password’
• Click Start All Programs Honeywell MasterLogic Server License Registration – Open the .cert license file received from Honeywell Browse to select the license certificate received from Honeywell
9
Select the .cert file and click Open
Experion Integration
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
18
9
Describe ML Server Software Licensing with EXP PKS 2/2/2012
Honeywell
License Update
• After installing the license certificate on an Experion Server, the features, including the number of points, are updated. • An updated license can be re-installed using the following steps: – Click Start > All Programs > Honeywell MasterLogic Server > License Registration – Click Supersede License – Enter the password – Enter the updated certificate and respond to the Re-License ML server dialog box
Experion Integration
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
19
Describe ML Server Software Licensing with EXP PKS 2/2/2012
Honeywell
License Transfer
• To transfer a license certificate from one Experion Server to another Experion Server: – Terminate the license certificate on the first Experion Server – Install the license certificate on the new Experion Server – A ‘.term’ file is generated after terminating the license and is used to transfer the license to a different machine
• To transfer the license to the other server, follow the installation steps in the ‘MasterLogic-Experion PKS Integration User's Guide’ on the CD
Experion Integration
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
20
10
Describe ML Server Software Licensing with EXP PKS 2/2/2012
Describe ML Server Configuration for EXP Integration
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Experion Integration
21
Describe ML Server Configuration for EXP Integration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
• MasterLogic Server configuration is required to communicate with MasterLogic PLC • Tools used for MasterLogic Server Configuration – ML Server Configuration Tool – Quick Builder Experion Server MasterLogic Server Configuration tool
Quick Builder (ML PLC Channel/Controller)
ML200R PLC
…..
ML200R PLC
9
ML200R PLC
MasterLogic Server
Experion Integration
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
22
11
Describe ML Server Configuration for EXP Integration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
ML Server Configuration By default, the PLC ML01 appears in the window and the first PLC is selected
Alarms and Events raised by the ML Server will be associated with this asset
Determines the speed in seconds after which Dynamic MLConfig XML Parameters are updated
Enter scan periods for different parameters in seconds
Experion Integration
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
23
Describe ML Server Configuration for EXP Integration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Add/ Delete PLC • ML200R PLCs must be added in ML Server Configuration tool – Each ML200R PLC can be configured separately – ML200R PLCs can also be deleted from this tool
Right-click on the PLC and select Delete PLC
Right-click on ML Server and select Add PLC
Experion Integration
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
24
12
Describe ML Server Configuration for EXP Integration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
PLC Tab •
General Parameters – PLC Name: Unique name for each PLC – PLC Type: PLC type such as ML200R, ML200-IEC, ML200NonIEC – EPKS Asset Name: Asset against which ML Server will raise status alarms and events – IP Address 1 and 2: used by the primary and secondary PLC Server on the Primary Network – IP Address 3 and 4: used by the primary and secondary PLC Server in case of dual network • ML Server searches for a valid PLC connection in the following sequence: IPAddress1, 2, 3 ,4
Experion Integration
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
25
Describe ML Server Configuration for EXP Integration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
PLC Configuration • RTC
9
– Enable Read/Write – allow ML Server to Read/Write RTC time from/to PLC – Sync Interval – time after which RTC time is read from PLC and updated in Experion – Deadband – PLC time is updated with Experion system time, if the time difference is equal to or greater than RTC Deadband
Experion Integration
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
26
13
Describe ML Server Configuration for EXP Integration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Logs Tab • PLC Logs
– Select ‘Events’ checkbox to transfer PLC events to Experion as Alarms/Events – Event Category selection indicates if the event needs to be transferred as an Alarm or Event to Experion • Event Category types – System Alarm – System Event – SOE
Experion Integration
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
27
Describe ML Server Configuration for EXP Integration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Advanced Tab • ML Server Advanced settings – Configured Bases • Select the bases which are present in the system • Reduces the load on MLServer since the system points are created only for selected bases • It is an optional setting • By default, system points are created for all 31 bases Select ‘Save Configuration’ on completion
Experion Integration
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
28
14
Describe ML Server Configuration for EXP Integration 2/2/2012
Configure Quick Builder Component Manager
Honeywell
• Open Quick Builder – Select Tools Component Manager – Enable ‘MasterLogic’ under devices items
Experion Integration
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
29
Describe ML Server Configuration for EXP Integration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Configure MasterLogic Channel
• MasterLogic Channel forms the interface between one or more MasterLogic Controllers and ML Servers – Configure only one MasterLogic channel in Quick Builder for all ML PLCs defined in ML Server Configuration tool
Ensure that the ‘Host Name’ (Preferred Data Source) contains localhost
9
Select the ‘Background Scan Period’ Experion Integration
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
30
15
Describe ML Server Configuration for EXP Integration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Configure MasterLogic Controller
• Configure MasterLogic controller in Quick Builder for ML PLCs defined in ML Server Configuration tool – If more than 700 PLC points need to be configured for a single ML PLC, more than one ML controller can be configured in Quick Builder for the same ML PLC • Ensure that within one ML controller, all the points must be configured for the same ML PLC
Select the MasterLogic Channel
Experion Integration
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
31
Upload System Point in Quick Builder
Describe ML Server Configuration for EXP Integration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
• Click the ‘Upload’ button in Quick Builder, to upload the ML PLC points that are built using PointBuild Utility during ML server configuration
ML Server downloaded from the ML Server Configuration tool
Experion Integration
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
32
16
Describe ML Server Configuration for EXP Integration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Configure Analog and Status Points
• Analog and Status Points are configured for exchanging data between MasterLogic Server and Experion
For Analog Point, enter the location as ML01.%MW10$CON#WORD For Status Point, enter Location as ML01.%MW10$CON#BIT
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Experion Integration
33
Describe ML Server Configuration for EXP Integration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Address MasterLogic Points in Quick Builder
• Address in Quick Builder points to a memory location in ML200R PLC – PLC ID • ItemName of associated ML PLC • Two digit number ranging from 01 from 99 and always prefixed by ML – Device Address • Memory Address location within ML PLC to retrieve data
ML01.%MW10$CON#WORD Memory area supported in ML200R
ML01: PLC ID %MW10: Device Address
• K memory area is supported starting Experion R310
9
– Support PID functions Experion Integration
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
34
17
Describe ML Server Configuration for EXP Integration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Address MasterLogic Points in Quick Builder • Command Type:
– Different commands are used to Read/Write data From/To ML200R PLC by ML Server • $CON: Continuous Read/Write command • $DEV: Device Area Read/Write command
ML01.%MW10$CON#WORD CON: Command Type Data Type in ML PLC Memory Address
Experion Integration
WORD: PLC Data Type
Corresponding Data type to be used by ML Server
X
BIT
B
BYTE
W
WORD and INT
D
DWORD, DINT and REAL
K
WORD and INT
L
LWORD, LINT and LREAL Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
35
Describe ML Server Configuration for EXP Integration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Addressing for DISOE Points
• Only DEV command type and BIT data type must be used for reading DISOE points • Base number, Slot number, and Channel number must not be prefixed with “0” SOE must be added for reading the SOE points
ML01.U1.2.6$DEV#BIT@SOE Syntax: .. Base Number and Slot Number where the DISOE module is connected and Channel Number of the Point which has to be read
Experion Integration
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
36
18
Describe ML Server Configuration for EXP Integration 2/2/2012
Enable MasterLogic Channel and Controller
Honeywell
Verify that the MasterLogic Channel is enabled and status is ‘OK’
Verify that the MasterLogic Controller is enabled and status is ‘OK’
Experion Integration
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
37
Describe ML Server Configuration for EXP Integration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
MasterLogic Points in Station
MasterLogic Analog Point Detail display
9
MasterLogic Status Point Detail display
Experion Integration
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
38
19
Describe ML Server Configuration for EXP Integration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
DISOE Events in Station
PLC name configured in ML Server Experion Integration
Point name configured in Quick Builder Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
39
Describe ML Server Configuration for EXP Integration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
This page intentionally left blank
Experion Integration
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
40
20
Describe ML Server Configuration for EXP Integration 2/2/2012
Topic: Experion Integration Contents Install ML Server Software on Experion ................................................................................................3 Get an ML Server License for Experion PKS ......................................................................................15 Install ML Server License on Experion PKS ........................................................................................19 Configure ML Server for Experion Integration .....................................................................................25
9
Configure MasterLogic Interface in QuickBuilder ................................................................................33
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
1
This page was intentionally left blank.
2
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
Experion Integration Install ML Server Software on Experion
Install ML Server Software on Experion Practice Objective The objective of this lab is to install Master Logic (ML) Server software on the Experion Server. Prerequisites Ensure that you have installed Experion Server with an OPC client license
•
Ensure that you have installed MS XML Version 6
•
Ensure that you have logged into the Experion server machine with Administrative privileges
9
•
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
3
Experion Integration Install ML Server Software on Experion
Procedures
Step
Action
Installation of ML Server 1
Right-Click on the setup application that is present in the ML Server Installation CD or Directory and select Run as Administrator. Select Allow on the User Account Control Window.
ATTENTION Ask Instructor for File Location. If an earlier version if the ML Server is already installed; the wizard displays an error message indicating that the previous ML Server version must be removed before installing a new version.
4
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
Experion Integration Install ML Server Software on Experion
Step 2
Action On the Welcome to the Installation Wizard dialog box, click Next.
ATTENTION If Experion server software is not found on the machine where the ML Server is being installed, the following message is displayed “EPKS Server is not found in this system. Installation is Aborting….” In response to this message dialog box, click OK and in the InstallShield Wizard Completed dialog box click Finish.
9
To continue with the ML Server installation, install EPKS server with an OPC Client license and then start reinstalling ML Server from the beginning.
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
5
Experion Integration Install ML Server Software on Experion
Step 3
6
Action In the License Agreement, select I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
Experion Integration Install ML Server Software on Experion
Step 4
Action In the Destination Folder dialog box, click on the Change… button to change the destination folder location if needed.
TIP Honeywell recommends retaining the default destination folder for installing the ML Server.
Click Next.
9
5
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
7
Experion Integration Install ML Server Software on Experion
Step 6
8
Action In the Ready to Install the Program dialog box, click Install.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
Experion Integration Install ML Server Software on Experion
Step
The InstallShield Wizard installs the MasterLogic Server software.
9
7
Action
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
9
Experion Integration Install ML Server Software on Experion
Step 8
10
Action In response to the InstallShield Wizard Completed dialog box, click Finish.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
Experion Integration Install ML Server Software on Experion
Step
Action
Verify Installation for ML Server 9
Verify that the graphic pages and .xml files shown below are present in the Abstract Server. C:\Program Data\Honeywell\Experion PKS\Client\Abstract. Type
Filename
xml files
Graphic Pages
MLConfig.xml
This file contains PLC Specific Configuration.
MLMonitor.xml
This file contains common settings for the ML Server and Graphics.
MLSOEConfig.xml
This file contains SOE Configuration for all PLCs.
MLPLC_Config.htm
This Experion Graphic Page displays the Base Slot Information of PLC.
MLPLC_Driver.htm
This Experion Graphic Page displays ML Server (Driver) diagnostics information.
MLConfig.xsd
XML Schema file for MLConfig.xml
MLMonitor.xsd
XML Schema file for MLMonitor.xml
MLSOEConfig.xsd
XML Schema file for MLSOEConfig.xml
9
Schema files
Description
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
11
Experion Integration Install ML Server Software on Experion
Step 10
Action Verify that the .xml, .exe, .dll files shown below are present in the MasterLogicServer. C:\Program Files\Honeywell\MasterLogicServer. An example of the MasterLogicServer is shown in the screen capture below. Type
Filename
Description
xml file
MLAPPSettings.xml
This file is used for configuring the MasterLogic Server application settings.
Schema file
MLAPPSettings.xsd
XML Schema file is used for MLAPPSettings.xml
12
Document
MLServer_User_Guide.pdf
This user guide describes how to integrate Master Logic PLC with EPKS.
Template
StatusPointBuildTemplate.txt
This is a template file for point building.
Configuratio n Tool
MLServerConfigTool.exe
This utility is used for configuring PLC information, SOE and other information for the ML Server.
Point Build Utility
PointBuiltUtility.exe
This utility is used for building the points corresponding to PLC and the parameters associated with the point.
License Application
MLServerLicenseRegistration. exe
This application is used for obtaining a new license, update, terminate and to transfer the license.
Demo certificate
MLPLC_Demo.cert
This is a Demo Certificate file for ML Server for 100 PLC Points.
QDB file
ML_Sample.qdb
This file contains sample ML Channel, ML Controller and sample ML Analog/Status Points.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
Experion Integration Install ML Server Software on Experion
Step 11
Action This is what the MasterLogicServer mentioned in Step 10 above looks like.
TIP The ML Server Configuration Tool, License Registration, User’s Guide and the License Application are accessed through Start All Programs Honeywell MasterLogic Server.
9
Shortcut for the Configuration Tool is available on the desktop.
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
13
Experion Integration Install ML Server Software on Experion
This page was intentionally left blank.
14
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
Experion Integration Get an ML Server License for Experion PKS
Get an ML Server License for Experion PKS Practice Objective •
This lab is for Reference Only.
•
The objective of this lab is to explain the procedure to obtain a license for the ML Server after installation.
Prerequisites ML Server is installed on the Experion Server.
•
Users should have the Voucher ID - This is provided by Honeywell when you purchase the ML Server.
•
Host ID Files – These files are automatically created when the ML Server License Registration Application is launched for the first time.
9
•
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
15
Experion Integration Get an ML Server License for Experion PKS
Procedures
Step
Action
Obtaining a License for ML Server – Reference Only 1 ATTENTION This lab is for Reference Only. 2
Ensure that the Voucher ID is present. This is provided by Honeywell when purchasing the ML Server.
3
Create the Host ID files by opening the MLServerLicenseRegistration.exe with administrator privileges (ML Server license registration application) from “C:\Program Files\Honeywell\ MasterLogicServer”.
ATTENTION The name of the Host ID files will be in the following format: .zip and .HID Example: If the computer name is EPKSSRVPC1 then the Host ID files created are EPKSSRVPC1.zip and EPKSSRVPC1.HID. These files are located in C:\ ProgramFiles\ Honeywell\ MasterLogicServer. 4
Send an e-mail with the subject line: Example:
16
VOUCHID:
VOUCHID:MLPLC_1PLC_50Points
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
Experion Integration Get an ML Server License for Experion PKS
Step 5
Action Attach the Host ID files: Example:
.zip and .HID
E00ESVXX.zip and E00ESVXX.HID
ATTENTION The subject line is case sensitive. Other than the subject, do not type any additional information in the e-mail.
[email protected]
Send the e-mail along with the attachments to:
7
After receiving the e-mail, Honeywell will send the new license certificate in a zip file. This file must be unzipped using the password password.
8
Save the license certificate in the ML Server system.
9
6
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
17
Experion Integration Get an ML Server License for Experion PKS
This page was intentionally left blank.
18
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
Experion Integration Install ML Server License on Experion PKS
Install ML Server License on Experion PKS Practice Objective This lab is for Reference Only. The objective of this lab is to install the ML200R license on an Experion Server. Prerequisites ML Server is installed on Experion Server.
•
The license is obtained from Honeywell using the procedure mentioned in the Describe Master Logic Programming lesson.
•
The license certificate file is copied to C:\Program files \ Honeywell \ MasterLogicServer.
9
•
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
19
Experion Integration Install ML Server License on Experion PKS
Procedures
Step
Action
Installing a license for ML Server. 1 ATTENTION This lab is for Reference only. Do not perform this lab in class. In class, we will be using Demo License.
2
20
Right click on License Registration option present in StartProgramsHoneywell MasterLogic Server and select Run as Administrator.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
Experion Integration Install ML Server License on Experion PKS
Step
In the ML Server License Registration dialog box, click Browse to locate the license certificate file.
9
3
Action
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
21
Experion Integration Install ML Server License on Experion PKS
Step 4
Action Select the certificate file from C:\Program files\Honeywell\MasterLogicServer and click Open.
ATTENTION Contact your instructor if the certificate file is not in the path shown above.
5
22
In the ML Server License Registration dialog box, click OK.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
Experion Integration Install ML Server License on Experion PKS
Step 6
Action Select Cancel in the ML Server License dialog box.
ATTENTION The ML Server License dialog box displays the Licensed number of PLCs and the Licensed Number of PLC points. These numbers will vary based on the license.
9
If the license is not terminated, then it is installed automatically when the ML server software is reinstalled on the same machine.
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
23
Experion Integration Install ML Server License on Experion PKS
This page was intentionally left blank.
24
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
Experion Integration Configure ML Server for Experion Integration
Configure ML Server for Experion Integration Objective The objective of this lab is to demonstrate and familiarize the user with configuration of the ML server using its Configuration Tool Prerequisites ML Server installed on Experion server with a license certificate Introduction In this lab you will perform the following: •
PLC information for ML Server will be configured using the ML Server Configuration Tool
•
Simulate the ladder logic using Soft Master simulator
9
PLC information such as PLC Name, ID, Type, IP Address, Logs and SOE are configured for each PLC in the plant. This information is used to build system points using Point Build Utility.
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
25
Experion Integration Configure ML Server for Experion Integration
Partition Sheet Item
Value to be Entered
MLPLC IP Address MLPLC IP Address
26
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
Experion Integration Configure ML Server for Experion Integration
Detailed Instructions
Step
Action
Configuration of ML Server using Configuration Tool. 1
Click on Start All Programs Honeywell MasterLogic Server Configuration Tool.
2
Default information of ML01 PLC will appear in the ML Server Configuration dialog box as shown below. Enter EPKS Asset Name as ML1 (This Asset must be created in Enterprise Model Builder and loaded on Experion Server having ML Server installed)
9
Click on ML01.
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
27
Experion Integration Configure ML Server for Experion Integration
Step 3
28
Action Now we will configure the PLC settings, under PLC field in the ML Server Configuration window.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
Experion Integration Configure ML Server for Experion Integration
Step
Action
4
From the PLC tab of the ML Server Configuration window, complete the General section as shown: PLC Name: MLPLC1 PLC Type: ML200R EPKS Asset Name: ML1
ATTENTION The PLC Name is a unique name for each PLC. It is alphanumeric, and there is no limit on the number of characters used.
5
Enter the IP Addresses for MLPLC. The ML Server searches for a valid PLC connection in the following sequence: IP Address 1, 2, 3, 4.
TIP
9
Refer to the partition sheet at the start of lab for your IP addresses.
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
29
Experion Integration Configure ML Server for Experion Integration
Step 6
Action Check Enable Read/Write in the RTC section. Also, enter the following data: •
Synch Interval: 5
•
Deadband: 10
TIP To update RTC time in Experion graphic displays, Enable Read/Write to RTC and EPKS Write must be checked. If Synch Interval is 0, then RTC time is not read or written from/to the PLC. If the Deadband value is 0 then RTC time is not written to the PLC. 7
From the ML Server Configuration window, under PLC Events field. Select the Events checkboxes for Error, System, Mode, and Shutdown.
TIP Keep all other settings in PLC Logs at the default values.
30
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
Experion Integration Configure ML Server for Experion Integration
Step
Action
8 In ConfiguredBases(Optional) field, select B1 and B2 (one at a time) and press button.
Close the ML Sever Configuration window.
9
9
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
31
Experion Integration Configure ML Server for Experion Integration
Step 10
Action In response to the ML Server Configuration ‘save’ dialog box, click on Yes.
TIP On selecting Yes button, the PointBuildUtility launches and creates the system points automatically. 11
32
Click OK when the configuration has been successfully saved. Ignore the Restart MLServer message.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
Experion Integration Configure MasterLogic Interface in QuickBuilder
Configure MasterLogic Interface in QuickBuilder Practice Objective The objective of this lab is to configure the MasterLogic interface in Quick Builder. Prerequisites •
The OPC Client license should be on the EPKS Server.
•
ML Server is installed on the Experion server along with the license certificate.
•
MLDP must be configured on the Experion server.
•
ML1 asset is configured and loaded on the EPKS server.
Introduction In this lab you will perform the following: Add the MasterLogic component in Quick Builder.
•
Create, configure and download an ML Channel.
•
Create, configure and download an ML Controller.
•
Create, configure and download an Analog and Status point.
9
•
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
33
Experion Integration Configure MasterLogic Interface in QuickBuilder
Procedures
34
Step
Action
1
Launch Configuration Studio and open Quick Builder.
2
To add a MasterLogic Channel in Quick Builder, first select Tools Component Manager…
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
Experion Integration Configure MasterLogic Interface in QuickBuilder
Step
In the Modify Project dialog box, select MasterLogic.
9
3
Action
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
35
Experion Integration Configure MasterLogic Interface in QuickBuilder
36
Step
Action
4
Scroll up and select Analog Point and Status Point if not already selected.
5
Click OK.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
Experion Integration Configure MasterLogic Interface in QuickBuilder Step
Action
6
In the Modify Project dialog box click OK.
7
To add the MasterLogic Channel, select Edit Add Items.
9
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
37
Experion Integration Configure MasterLogic Interface in QuickBuilder
38
Step
Action
8
In the Add Item(s) dialog box, select MasterLogic Channel.
9
Click OK.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
Experion Integration Configure MasterLogic Interface in QuickBuilder
Step
Accept the default values for the channel.
9
10
Action
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
39
Experion Integration Configure MasterLogic Interface in QuickBuilder
40
Step
Action
11
Select Tools Download.
12
In the download dialog box, select Selected items only and click OK.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
Experion Integration Configure MasterLogic Interface in QuickBuilder Step
Action
13
Click OK in the Results window.
14
To add a MasterLogic Controller, select Edit Add Items.
15
In the Add Item(s) dialog box, select MasterLogic Controller and click OK.
9
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
41
Experion Integration Configure MasterLogic Interface in QuickBuilder
Step 16
Action In the MasterLogic Controller configuration window select the following: Channel Name: CHAMAS1 Background Scan: Enabled
42
17
Repeat steps 11 to 13 for downloading the ML Controller.
18
To add a MasterLogic Analog Point, select Edit Add Items.
19
From the Add Item(s) dialog box, select Analog Point.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
Experion Integration Configure MasterLogic Interface in QuickBuilder
Step 20
Action In the MasterLogic Point configuration window, enter the following: Parent Asset: ML1 PV Scan Period : 1
In the MasterLogic Point configuration window, click on the browse the PV Source Address.
button to select
9
21
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
43
Experion Integration Configure MasterLogic Interface in QuickBuilder
Step 22
Action In the Address Builder window, select the following: Address Type: Controller Controller: CONMAS1 Enter the Location: ML01.%WW10$CON#WORD and click OK.
23
Go to the Control tab.
24
On the Control tab define the Source Address and Dest Address for the Setpoint (SP) and Output (OP) by selecting the browse button
25
.
In the Address Builder dialog box, select the controller CONMAS1 (for both Setpoint and Output) and enter the following locations: Setpoint (SP) Source Address : ML01.%WW11$CON#WORD Dest Address Output (OP)Source Address Dest Address
26
44
: ML01.%WW11$CON#WORD : ML01.%WW12$CON#WORD : ML01.%WW12$CON#WORD
Set the Scan Period = 1 sec.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
Experion Integration Configure MasterLogic Interface in QuickBuilder
Step 27
Action On the Alarm tab, configure two alarms using following settings: •
Alarm Type: PVHigh Priority: High Limit: 90
•
Alarm Type: PVLow Priority: High Limit: 20
28
Repeat steps 11 to 13 to download the Analog point.
29
To add a MasterLogic Status Point, select Edit Add Items.
30
From the Add Item(s) dialog box select Status Point.
31
In the Main tab, enter the following: Parent Asset: ML1 PV Scan Period : 1 On State Descriptors: Enter State 1 ON and State 0 OFF
32 33
Select the browse
button to select the PV Source Address.
In the Address Builder dialog box, select the following: Address Type: Controller Controller: CONMAS1 Enter the Location: ML01.%MX10$CON#BIT and click OK.
34
Go to the Control tab.
35
On the Control tab, define the Source and Dest Addresses for the Output (OP) by selecting the browse button
36
.
In the Address Builder dialog box, select controller CONMAS1 and enter the Location as shown below: Output (OP)Source Address Dest Address
: ML01.%MX12$CON#BIT : ML01.%MX12$CON#BIT
2/2/2012
37
Set the Scan Period = 1 sec.
38
Go to the Alarm Tab. On the Alarm Tab, select On Alarm (State 1 Alarm) and set the Priority as High.
39
Repeat steps 11 to 13 to download the Status point.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
9
Click OK.
45
Experion Integration Configure MasterLogic Interface in QuickBuilder
46
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
Describe MasterLogic System Display in Station
Monitoring MasterLogic Status in Station
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
1
Describe MasterLogic System Display in Station 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Introduction •
Experion System Status displays and Custom displays are used for monitoring the PLC status
•
Standard Station Displays – Channel Summary Page – Point Detail Display
•
Custom Displays – PLC System Status display • MLPLC_Config.htm • MLPLC_Driver.htm
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
2
1
Describe MasterLogic System Display in Station 2/2/2012
10
Monitoring MasterLogic Status in Station
Honeywell
Custom Display
Information of the ML PLC like PLC ID, PLC type, base and last RTC Based-time Indicates information about the Controller IP Address. Shows Rack Configuration
CPU information and Miscellaneous Flags Status, CPU Error Status is shown
Monitoring MasterLogic Status in Station
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
3
Describe MasterLogic System Display in Station 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Base •
Base is the back plane of PLC on which the power supply, communication, and other modules are installed
•
Base on the configuration page indicates 3 different base numbers – Base 0 (Master) – Base 0 (Stby) – Base 1
Monitoring MasterLogic Status in Station
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4
2
Describe MasterLogic System Display in Station 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Driver Info
Driver Info Tab shows the Diagnostic Parameter Information of the ML Server, status of communication between ML Server, PLC, and Experion
Monitoring MasterLogic Status in Station
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
5
Describe MasterLogic System Display in Station 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Analog Point Detail Display
Displays the location in PLC where the values are stored
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
6
3
Describe MasterLogic System Display in Station 2/2/2012
10
Monitoring MasterLogic Status in Station
Honeywell
Status Point Detail Display
Displays the location in PLC where the values are stored
Monitoring MasterLogic Status in Station
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
7
Describe MasterLogic System Display in Station 2/2/2012
Honeywell
This page intentionally left blank
Monitoring MasterLogic Status in Station
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
8
4
Describe MasterLogic System Display in Station 2/2/2012
Topic: Monitoring MasterLogic Status in Station Contents Monitor Communication Status of ML Server Interface.........................................................................3
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
1
10
Monitor MasterLogic Status using Experion Station ..............................................................................7
This page was intentionally left blank.
2
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
Monitoring MasterLogic Status in Station Monitor Communication Status of ML Server Interface
Monitor Communication Status of ML Server Interface Practice Objective The objective of this LAB is to demonstrate the communication of the MLDP interfaces in the Experion PKS server.
•
ML Server is configured on the Experion server.
•
An ML Channel and ML Controller are built and downloaded to the Experion PKS server.
•
ML FEnet Card must be set to MLDP server on Standard Settings
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
3
10
Prerequisites
Monitoring MasterLogic Status in Station Monitor Communication Status of ML Server Interface
Procedures
4
Step
Action
1
Click on Start All Programs Honeywell Experion PKS Server Station.
2
In Station, select View System Status Channels.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
Monitoring MasterLogic Status in Station Monitor Communication Status of ML Server Interface
Step 3
Action On the Channel Status Summary page, select the Enable checkbox for CHAMAS1 to enable the ML Channel.
ATTENTION For Enabling/Disabling hardware, your access level should be equal to or greater than SUPV.
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
5
10
To connect Server to PLC, FEnet Protocol settings should be set to MLDP Server
Monitoring MasterLogic Status in Station Monitor Communication Status of ML Server Interface
Step 4
Action Click on CHAMAS1 to open the Channel Status page. Monitor the communication using the Error Statistics and the Barometer.
5
Repeat steps 2 to 4 for enabling the ML Controller and monitoring the communication status. ATTENTION In Step 2, select Controllers.
6
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
Monitoring MasterLogic Status in Station Monitor MasterLogic Status using Experion Station
Monitor MasterLogic Status using Experion Station Practice Objective The objective of this LAB is to monitor the MasterLogic Status in Experion PKS station.
•
ML Server is configured on the Experion server.
•
An ML Channel, ML Controller and ML Points (Analog/Status) are built and downloaded in the Experion PKS server.
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
7
10
Prerequisites
Monitoring MasterLogic Status in Station Monitor MasterLogic Status using Experion Station
Procedures
Step
Action
1
Click on Start All Programs Honeywell Experion PKS Server Station.
2
In the Command Zone, type MLPLC_Config and press Enter.
ATTENTION Installation of ML Server creates the following graphic pages: MLPLC_Config, MLPLC_Status and MLPLC_Driver.
8
3
On the MLPLC_Config page observe the Configuration Information of the system.
4
To view the Configuration Information of each base, select Base 0 (Master) in the Base drop-down box.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
Monitoring MasterLogic Status in Station Monitor MasterLogic Status using Experion Station
Step
Action
5
Monitor the Configuration Information of 2MLR-CPUH and 2MLL-EFMT on Base 0 (Master).
6
Repeat steps 4 and 5 for Base 0 (Stby) and Base1.
7
On the MLPLC_Config page, go to the Driver Info tab.
8
Monitor the Driver Info page of MLPLC.
9
In the Command Zone, type poista1 and press F12 (Detail).
10
On the detail display page of poista1, click on the Scanning tab.
11
Note the Source and Destination addresses:__________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________
12
Change the values of the Source Address using Monitor Address Monitoring in SoftMaster. Use the following values: %MX10 : 1
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
9
10
%MX12 : 1
Monitoring MasterLogic Status in Station Monitor MasterLogic Status using Experion Station
Step 13
10
Action Monitor the PV and OP status and High Priority Alarm.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
Monitoring MasterLogic Status in Station Monitor MasterLogic Status using Experion Station
Step
Action
14
Change the OP value from the Point Detail display in station. Using Monitor Address Monitoring check whether the value has been written to the specified destination address in SoftMaster. %MX12 (Address)
: 0 (Value)
15
For your Analog point, type poiana1 in the Command Zone and press F12 (Detail).
16
On detail display page of poiana1, click on the Scanning tab.
17
Note the Source and Destination Addresses for SP,PV, and OP:__________________ _____________________________________________________________________
18
Change the values of the Source Address using Monitor Address Monitoring in SoftMaster. Use following values: %WW10: 44 %WW11: 66
2/2/2012
19
Monitor the SP, PV and OP status in station.
20
Change the SP to 55 and change the OP to 70 from the Point Detail display. Using Monitor Address Monitoring check whether the value has been written to the specified destination address in SoftMaster. %WW11 (Address)
: 55 (Value)
%WW12 (Address)
: 70 (Value)
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
11
10
%WW12: 95
Monitoring MasterLogic Status in Station Monitor MasterLogic Status using Experion Station
This page was intentionally left blank.
12
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
11
Describe the LM to ML Migration
LM-ML Migration Support
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
1
Describe the LM to ML Migration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
• ML PLC provides all functionalities available in the Logic Manager – ML PLC has advanced technical features
• Following are some of the reasons for migrating to Master Logic (ML) from existing Logic Manager (LM) – – – – – –
Latest technology Higher program memory (10MB) Higher flash memory (16MB) Higher transmission speed (100 Mbps) Higher IO handling capacity (23,808 rack IO) Supports combination of Ladder and Function Blocks (IEC61131-3 compliant) – Windows-based programming software – PLC History (Error, Mode, Shutdown, System) available – Status LEDs available on CPU and IO modules
LM-ML Migration Support
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
2
1
Describe the LM to ML Migration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Benefits of Migration to ML PLC
• Zero footprint solution preserves existing field wiring with minimal or no disruption • Easy migration of LM database using Migration Tool • Conserves the engineering convention/practices of the plant • Seamless replacement • Shutdown time for LM migration is 48 hours or less • Provides long-term support and future upgrades
LM-ML Migration Support
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
3
Honeywell
Migration Prerequisites • • • • • • • • •
Describe the LM to ML Migration 2/2/2012
Standard Conventions Control System specification EB files PRN files IO Database UCN details Peer connection list and peer-to peer-design concepts SI array flags and numerics HPM load calculation
LM-ML Migration Support
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4
2
Describe the LM to ML Migration 2/2/2012
11 Honeywell
LM Migration Solutions Based on User Scenarios SCENARIO #1
• LM used as PLC • Need Peer to Peer with UCN nodes
Migration Solution
• Replace LM using MLPLC via HPM-Serial Interface • Keep the field wiring intact using wiring kits • Identify the wiring kits required by the wiring kit calculator tool
Readiness Check
• Existing HPM has slot for serial interface card • Current load/configuration check using HPM readiness tool
SCENARIO #2
• LM used as PLC • Or any IPC620 PLC standalone or connected to Hiway Interface Module (HIM) • Do not need Peer to Peer with UCN Nodes
Migration Solution
• Replace LM using MLPLC via EPLCG • Keep the field wiring intact using wiring kits • Identify the wiring kits required by the wiring kit calculator tool
Readiness Check
• Customer already has EPLCG or can afford to buy new • Redundancy needed?
SCENARIO #3
• LM used as Safety System
Migration Solution
• Replace LM using FSC
Readiness Check
• Check what percent of safety signals in LM • Split signals? Take Safety signal to FSC and rest to Master Logic PLC
LM-ML Migration Support
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Describe the LM to ML Migration 2/2/2012
5
Honeywell
LM Migration Solution: HPM-SI (Serial Interface) • ML Controller connected to HPM via Serial Interface
Serial Interface Existing LM System
LM-ML Migration Support
LM Migrated System
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
6
3
Describe the LM to ML Migration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
LM Migration Solution: Path 2 EPLCG • ML Controller is connected via EPLC Gateway
LM Migrated System
Existing LM System
LM-ML Migration Support
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Describe the LM to ML Migration 2/2/2012
7
Honeywell
LM Migration Solution: Path 3 FSC • If the LM is responsible for handling Safety signals: – Safety signals will be transferred to the Fail Safe Controller (FSC) – Other process logic will be controlled by the ML PLC
LM Migrated System
Existing LM System
LM-ML Migration Support
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
8
4
Describe the LM to ML Migration 2/2/2012
11 Honeywell
Migration Items Change Point references
HMI
HMI
Recompile displays LCN
LCN
NIM
NIM UCN
FSC
FSC UCN
Change Point references
HPM
HPM PMIO
PMIO
Recompile CL Programs
LM
LM points to HPM-SI points
LCS IO
SI Card
LM LCS IO
Wiring Kits
LM
Changes LM Ladder to ML Ladder LCS IO
LM LCS IO
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
LM-ML Migration Support
Master Logic
Describe the LM to ML Migration 2/2/2012
9
Honeywell
Wiring Manager
• Wiring kit introduced as part of LM-ML Migration provides a costeffective solution – Interfaced with Field Cable Termination Kit – Enables seamless migration of LM to ML without disturbing field wiring Field Cables
Custom Cables
ML Processor and Power
ML I/O Rack
Device 1
Edge connector on Wiring Kit Field Connector Termination PCB
Field Cable
Device 2
Wiring Kit
Device 12 Finger PCB LM-ML Migration Support
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
10
5
Describe the LM to ML Migration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Benefits of Wiring Kit Solution • Field wiring remains intact while migrating
• Wiring kit considers LCS I/O variations and maps them to ML I/O resulting in an optimum signal match solution • Common solution for Direct-wired and Remote Terminal Panel types • Additional panel space is not required • Installation of ML PLC in different panels other than the existing LM is supported
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
LM-ML Migration Support
11
Describe the LM to ML Migration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Wiring Kit Operating Models WORKING MODE
Wiring kit
ML replaces LM in same space
Wiring kit SERVICE MODE
Guide Rail Custom Cables – Kit to ML
Master Logic PLC
Logic Manager (LM) Chassis
Master Logic PLC & IO
LM-ML Migration Support
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
12
6
Describe the LM to ML Migration 2/2/2012
11 Honeywell
Custom Cable
Logic Manager Wiring Kit
ML PLC I/O Connections
Connects to finger PCB in the wiring kit
LM-ML Migration Support
Connects to ML PLC I/O Slot
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
13
Describe the LM to ML Migration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Requirements of Wiring Kit • Safety requirements of Wire Manager: – – – –
PCB circuitry should retain channel-to-channel isolation Complies with NEC code for safety Finger PCBs should be removable for maintenance Allows easy accessibility of field connectors and terminal blocks of the ML PLC IO – Cable termination should be on the respective terminal blocks using proper lugs and ferrules
• Performance requirements of Wire Manager: – Wiring kit should ensure compatibility of signals to corresponding ML IOs – Wiring kit PCBs acts as termination board and enables signal connectivity wherever there is direct one-to-one compatibility of signals – Wiring kit may include an active card with signal conditioning circuitry where the signals levels / logic are incompatible – Wiring kit should retain isolation as in existing LM channel-to-channel and input-to-output
LM-ML Migration Support
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
14
7
Describe the LM to ML Migration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Automated Conversion Processes and Tools • Automated Conversion tool is used for:
– Conversion of LM points and ladder programs to ML PLC/ HPM SI points
LM Configuration Definition and Mapping
LM to MLPLC IO MAP Report
LM-ML Migration Support
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
15
Describe the LM to ML Migration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Migration Guideline • Migrate LM Processor – Replace LM processor with ML PLC
• Migrate LM I/O rack – Remove LM I/O (local) rack – Replace ML PLC (local) I/O rack
• Regroup LM I/O channels • Regrouping for UAIM • Migrate LM database
LM-ML Migration Support
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
16
8
Describe the LM to ML Migration 2/2/2012
11 Honeywell
Migrate LM Processor • Remove LM I/O Module
– Remove the I/O communication wiring between LM I/O module and the LM Processor module
• Replace LM Processor – Unscrew the mounting screws and remove the LM processor – On the panel, mount the ML PLC mounting plate in place of the removed LM processor – Mount the ML PLC processor on the ML PLC mounting plate – Connect the power supply for the ML PLC processor
LM-ML Migration Support
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
17
Honeywell
Migrate LM I/O Rack •
Describe the LM to ML Migration 2/2/2012
Remove LM I/O (local) rack – Identify field cables to be removed – Verify cable tags and ferrules to ensure that they match with wiring diagrams – Remove swing arm connectors of the field cables – Safely unscrew the mounting screws – Remove LM I/O rack
LM-ML Migration Support
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
18
9
Describe the LM to ML Migration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Migrate LM I/O Rack •
Replace with ML PLC I/O (Local) rack –
Mount wiring kit in place of the LM I/O rack using mounting screws
LM-ML Migration Support
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
19
Describe the LM to ML Migration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Migrate LM I/O rack • Identify finger PCBs to be inserted (in the Wiring kit)
Active Boards
Passive Boards
•
Note: Selection of Active or Passive boards depends on type of LM I/O module. Detailed Information will be published.
LM-ML Migration Support
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
20
10
Describe the LM to ML Migration 2/2/2012
11 Honeywell
Migrate LM I/O Rack • Identify custom cables to be connected to finger PCBs • Insert the custom cable through the bottom of the Wiring Kit
•
Note: Selection of a custom cable depends on using an Active or Passive board.
LM-ML Migration Support
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
21
Describe the LM to ML Migration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Migrate LM I/O Rack
• Connect the longer wire to the upper end of the finger PCB and connect the shorter wire to the lower end of the finger PCB • Insert finger PCBs in the corresponding slot of the Wiring Kit
LM-ML Migration Support
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
22
11
Describe the LM to ML Migration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Migrate LM I/O Rack
• Connect the swing arm connectors (hanging from the field wiring) to the corresponding finger PCBs on the Wiring Kit
LM-ML Migration Support
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
23
Describe the LM to ML Migration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Migrate LM I/O Rack
• Connect the ML PLC connectors of the custom cables to the corresponding I/O modules of the mounted ML PLC I/O rack • Connect the power supply for the Wiring Kit based on the electrical requirements • Install SoftMaster in the identified computer
LM-ML Migration Support
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
24
12
Describe the LM to ML Migration 2/2/2012
11 Honeywell
Regroup •
Regroup LM I/O channels – – –
•
Identify custom cables that must be used for regrouping the LM I/O channels Connect one end of the custom cable to the finger PCBs in the Wiring kit Connect the other end of the custom cables to the adjacent identified ML PLC I/O modules
Regrouping for UAIM –
Identify the I/O type of the UAIM being used in the existing LM. (For example, the UAIM can be an RTD or Thermocouple etc.) – Regroup based on signal type and the available spare slots in the ML PLC I/O rack – With references to the cable tags and the ferrules, terminate them in the appropriate ML PLC I/O rack
LM-ML Migration Support
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
25
Describe the LM to ML Migration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Migrate LM Database •
Migrate LM Ladder Logic to the equivalent ML PLC Ladder Logic
•
DI, DO, AI, AO Flag, numeric points are migrated to equivalent HPM SI array points
•
Digital composite points are migrated to the equivalent Ladder Logic in the ML PLC and HPM SI Array Point
•
Logic points are migrated to the equivalent Ladder Logic in the ML PLC
LM-ML Migration Support
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
26
13
Describe the LM to ML Migration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Post Migration Check
All LM processors are replaced with respective ML PLC processors All LM I/Os are connected to corresponding finger PCBs on the Wiring Kit All finger PCBs on the Wiring Kit are connected to the corresponding ML PLC I/O modules All cabling is intact and there are no freely hanging cables Perform basic power supply tests and loop checks Perform software migration check
LM-ML Migration Support
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
27
Describe the LM to ML Migration 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Post Migration Check Check for changed displays
Rebuild all points in other nodes (xPMs/AM) accessing the LM points Idle the HPM and change the HPM SI scan, if required Check for redundancy requirement of the migrated modules
LM-ML Migration Support
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
28
14
Describe the LM to ML Migration 2/2/2012
12
Describe Controller Diagnostics
MasterLogic TroubleShooting
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
1
Describe Controller Diagnostics 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
• Firmware of MasterLogic System must be upgraded only by Honeywell support personnel • The MasterLogic controller can be diagnosed based on the LED status and visual indicators available on the modules • In this lesson, we will learn about the status LED and visual indicators for the: – CPU – Power supply – Extension Modules
MasterLogic TroubleShooting
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
2
1
Describe Controller Diagnostics 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Power Supply Diagnostics
S. No 1 2
Name
Description
Power LED
LED indicator for 5VDC power
24VDC / Run terminal
Indicates RUN state of system OFF when CPU error occurs OFF when CPU mode is changed to STOP mode
3
FG terminal
Frame ground terminal
4
LG terminal
Line ground terminal
5
Power input terminal
Used to connect the power supply
6
Terminal cover
Cover for protection of terminal Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
MasterLogic TroubleShooting
3
Honeywell
CPU Diagnostics S. No 1
Name Operation Mode Switch RUN / REM / STOP
Description Operation mode of CPU module is configured by key switch RUN Mode: Program Running STOP Mode: Program Stop REM Mode: Operation mode can be set by programming tool
2-a
RUN / STOP LED
Operation status of CPU module Green: 'RUN' mode Red: 'Stop' mode
2-b
WAR LED
ON (Yellow): Warning / Off: Normal Note: Warning LED is used to indicate multiple status like System hardware status, and FORCE IO condition
2-c
ERR LED
ON (Red): Critical Error / Off: Normal
2-d
Operation LED
4 Digit Display of Operation Status (Refer to ML200R error code)
2-e
Redundant Status
• RING ON: Green (Ring topology is established) • RING OFF: Ring is not established • RING Blink: Once Ring -> Disabled • RED ON: Redundancy LED (Redundant operation mode) • RED OFF: Single operation • MASTER ON: CPU is operating as Master • MASTER OFF: CPU is operating as Standby • CPU-A, CPU-B: CPU classification
2-f
Extension Network Status
Communication Status with Extension Base ACT ON (YELLOW): Channel is in operation LNK ON (GREEN): Channel link is enabled
MasterLogic TroubleShooting
Describe Controller Diagnostics 4/25/2012
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4
2
Describe Controller Diagnostics 4/25/2012
S. No
Name
Description
3
Sync. connector
Interface connector between CPUs
4-a
Connector for extension network
Connector used for extending the base 2 Connectors are provided for establishing ring topology Connectors can be of Fiber Optic or twisted pair type
4-b
5-a
Boot/Normal Switch
Used for OS Download ON (right): Normal mode Off (left): Prohibited (Off may cause damage to module)
5-b
A/B Side for CPU
Switch to define CPU classification CPU Module is A if the switch is in Left side CPU Module is B if the switch is in Right side
5-c
Reset/D. Clear switch
Switch set from center to left – Reset CPU Switch set from center to left for more than 3 sec – Overall Reset CPU Switch set from center to right – Clear CPU
6
USB Connector
USB Connector (USB 1.1)
7
RS-232C Connector
RS-232C Connector
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
MasterLogic TroubleShooting
5
Honeywell
Extension Modules – Status LED’s LED Name
LED Status
Network or Module Status
TX/RX
ON
Channel is in operation
LINK
ON
Channel link is enabled
ON
Ring topology is established
Flashing
Ring topology is disabled
RING
RELAY
CHK FAULT
RUN
I/F
OFF
Network disconnected
ON
Neighboring module is connected and data is being relayed
OFF
No Neighboring module is connected
ON
ML200R CPU in Warning state
Flashing
Duplicated station number found
ON
Duplicated
Flashing
Frame error
ON
ML200R CPU in RUN Mode
Flashing
Waiting status for CPU acknowledgement
OFF
ML200R CPU in Stop Mode
Flashing
Normal connection status
OFF
Connection is not established
PADT
ON
SoftMaster / SoftMaster-NM connection
ERR
ON
ML200R CPU in Error Status
MasterLogic TroubleShooting
Describe Controller Diagnostics 4/25/2012
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
6
3
Describe Controller Diagnostics 4/25/2012
12
Honeywell
CPU Diagnostics (continued)
Honeywell
Extension Drive diagnostics
S. No
Name
Description
1
Module Status LED
Status LED
2
Base Number Switch
Switch to configure Extension Base x10: 10 digit, x1: 1 digit Max. 31-base setting
3
USB Connector
Connector for SoftMaster (USB 1.1)
4
Expansion Network Connector
Connector for Expansion Base 2 Connectors are present 3 types: F.O - F.O, Twisted Pair – Twisted Pair, F.O – Twisted pair
5
RESET switch for Expansion driver module
Reset the module when pushed Base needs to be skipped before the module is reset. If the base is not skipped before the reset, disconnection error occurs
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
MasterLogic TroubleShooting
Describe Controller Diagnostics 4/25/2012
7
Honeywell
Controller Error codes •
ML200R CPU Error codes
– Error codes are displayed on the 4-digit operational status display – Some example Error codes
Error code
Cause
Corrective Action (Solution)
Operation status
LED status
Diagnostic timing
502
Low battery voltage
Replace a battery with the power on
-
BAT: On
Always
101
CPU position error
CPU is installed at wrong position. Position the CPU correctly.
STOP
S101
Turn it on
103
Base abnormal error
Configure expansion cable as ring topology and position the detached base correctly. For information of detached base, refer to CPU error log.
STOP, RUN
E103
Execute program
•
Refer to the ‘MasterLogic 200R CPU User’s Manual’ for more information on error contents, diagnosis and corrective actions
MasterLogic TroubleShooting
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
8
4
Describe Controller Diagnostics 4/25/2012
• Consider Side – A is running as Master and Side – B is running as Standby • Power supply of both CPU is failed and the CPU which was in Standby mode is powered on first • In this case, powered on CPU stays in the standby mode and waits for other (primary) CPU to turn on – To cause the standby to start as primary once it's in standby waiting for the primary, turn switch to stop and back to run. It now runs as primary and master light is lit.
MasterLogic TroubleShooting
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
9
Describe Controller Diagnostics 4/25/2012
Honeywell
This page intentionally left blank
MasterLogic TroubleShooting
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
10
5
Describe Controller Diagnostics 4/25/2012
12
Honeywell
Redundancy Behavior of ML PLC
Describe IO Diagnostics
MasterLogic TroubleShooting
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
11
Describe IO Diagnostics 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
• In this lesson, we will learn about the status LEDs and visual indicators for the: – – – –
AI Module AO Module High Speed Counter ThermoCouple (TC) Input Module
MasterLogic TroubleShooting
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
12
6
Describe IO Diagnostics 4/25/2012
LED Name
LED Status
Normal Operation
ON
RUN LED
ALM LED
Description
Flashing every 0.2 sec
Module hardware error
Flashing every 1 sec
Module software error
OFF
Module off
OFF
Operation normal
Flashing
Data Processing alarm or Change rate alarm
2MLF-AD4S
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
MasterLogic TroubleShooting
13
Diagnostics of AO Modules (2MLF- DV4A, DC4A) RUN LED status
Describe IO Diagnostics 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Description
ON
Normal Operation
Flashing
Parameter Settings error or Digital Input Conversion values error
OFF
Module off
2MLF-DV4A MasterLogic TroubleShooting
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
14
7
2MLF-DC4A Describe IO Diagnostics 4/25/2012
12
Honeywell
Diagnostics of AI Module (2MLF - AD4S)
Diagnostics of AO Modules (2MLF- DV4S, DC4S) LED Name
LED Status
ALM LED
Description Normal Operation
ON RUN LED
Honeywell
Flashing every 0.2 sec
Module hardware error
OFF
Module off
OFF
Operation normal
Flashing
Data Processing alarm or Change rate alarm
2MLF-DV4S2 Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
MasterLogic TroubleShooting
Describe IO Diagnostics 4/25/2012
15
Diagnostics of High Speed Counters (2MLF-HO2A/HD2A) LED Name
MLF-DC4S
Honeywell
Description
∅A
A-phase pulse input
∅B
B-phase pulse input
P
External preset input
G
External gate input
OUT0
OUT0 compared output
OUT1
OUT1 compared output
READY
Ready signal
2MLF-HO2A/HD2A MasterLogic TroubleShooting
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
16
8
Describe IO Diagnostics 4/25/2012
LED Name
RUN LED
ALM LED
LED Status
Honeywell
Description
ON
Normal Operation
Flashing every 0.2 sec
Module hardware error
OFF
Module off
OFF
Operation normal
Flashing every 1 sec
Sensor Disconnect Alarm
2MLF-TC4S
MasterLogic TroubleShooting
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
17
Describe IO Diagnostics 4/25/2012
Honeywell
This page intentionally left blank
MasterLogic TroubleShooting
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
18
9
Describe IO Diagnostics 4/25/2012
12
Diagnostics of TC Input Module (2MLF-TC 4S)
Describe Diagnostics on Interface Modules
MasterLogic TroubleShooting
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
19
Describe Diagnostics on Interface Modules 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
• Troubleshooting Interface Modules can be performed using the following diagnostics: – Symptoms and Management by LEDs – Diagnosis of Communication Module through SoftMaster-NM • Communication Module Information • Ping Test • Frame Monitor • Loop Back Test • Network Autoscan – System LOG
MasterLogic TroubleShooting
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
20
10
Describe Diagnostics on Interface Modules 4/25/2012
• Diagnostic Functions with SoftMaster-NM – Select Online System Diagnosis option in the menu bar of NM – Right click on the FEnet module to view the Diagnostic Functions
Displays the general information (speed, version, etc.) about the module
Diagnostic Functions
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
MasterLogic TroubleShooting
21
Describe Diagnostics on Interface Modules 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Status by Service
• Status by Service - Displays the status of Dedicated Communication, P2P, HS Link Service Basic Module information Diagnostic information Driver type information High-speed Link Service information
P2P Service information MasterLogic TroubleShooting
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
22
11
Describe Diagnostics on Interface Modules 4/25/2012
12
Honeywell
Troubleshooting FEnet
Honeywell
Ping Test • Ping Test Target details for Ping Test
Ping Test Results
Basic Module information
Detailed information
Start test Ping Test status
MasterLogic TroubleShooting
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
23
Describe Diagnostics on Interface Modules 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Troubleshooting FEnet • Autoscan
– Provides IP information for all modules specified on the present network
Module, Link and Media status
Basic Module information
FEnet Architecture Read Continuous or Refresh current data
Auto scan status
MasterLogic TroubleShooting
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
24
12
Describe Diagnostics on Interface Modules 4/25/2012
• LED Indications LED
Error
Action
RUN (Normally ON)
Turned OFF after FEnet module is powered ON
Ethernet communication module incorrectly installed Check DC 5V power supply of power module Check if the communication module is correctly installed on the base Check if communication module is correctly perceived with SoftMasterNM
I/F (Normally ON)
LED ON or OFF during normal communication
Check the operation state of CPU module Check if the communication module is correctly installed on the base Check if module information is correctly perceived with SoftMaster software
P2P (Normally ON if using)
Turned off during P2P command service
Check if the basic parameter is downloaded correctly Check if the function block/command is edited correctly Check if the media is connected correctly Check if ‘Link Enable’ is enabled
HS (Normally ON if using)
Turned of during HS link service
Check if the basic parameter is downloaded correctly Check if HS link setting is correct Check if ‘Link Enable’ is enabled
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
MasterLogic TroubleShooting
25
Describe Diagnostics on Interface Modules 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Troubleshooting FEnet • LED Indications (continued) LED
Error
Action
PADT
Turned OFF during remote connection service
Check if IP address for remote (PADT) connection is normal Check if remote connection of PADT is disconnected
PC
Turned OFF during dedicated service
Check if IP address for dedicated connection is correct Check if Host table is enabled If Host table is enabled, check if the IP address of HMI (PC) is registered in the host table Check if connection is requested from MMI (PC) device
ERR
Turned ON during normal communication
Check if the basic parameter is downloaded correctly Check for any error in interface with CPU
TX
Turned ON during transmitting data
Check if request frame is received normally from the client
RX
Turned ON during receiving data
Check for any error in receiving program Check for any error in frame edits Check if the media is connected correctly
PHY
Turned OFF during normal communication
Check if the media is composed of 100Mbps (Auto-Negotiation)
MasterLogic TroubleShooting
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
26
13
Describe Diagnostics on Interface Modules 4/25/2012
12
Honeywell
Troubleshooting FEnet
Honeywell
Error Codes • Module checking through error codes Error code
Error display
Description
E00-01
ECM_12 – ECM_15
H/W self-diagnosis error
E00-02
ECM_13, ECM_18
Interfacing error with CPU
E02-01
ECM_18
Interface abnormal between FEnet I/F module and CPU
E03-01
HS link parameter setting error
After online link is enabled, HS link parameters specified incorrectly, or not specified.
E03-02
HS link not executable
After link enabled with HS link parameters, normal communication is not available as desired.
E03-03
_HSxRLNK and _HSxTRX contacts not ON when HS link executed
After link is enabled with HS link parameters, _HSxRLNK is not ON.
E03-04
_HSxLTBL contact ON when HS link executed
After link enabled with HS link’s _HSxRLNK ON, _HSxLTBL is ON due to PLC or communication error.
E04-01
[No response] message displayed when remote connection requested
RS-232C cable not connected or PLC is OFF.
E04-02
[Other error message] displayed when remote connection requested
Service not executed normally due to unsuitable request
MasterLogic TroubleShooting
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
27
Describe Diagnostics on Interface Modules 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Troubleshooting Pnet • System Diagnosis by SoftMaster-NM
– Detailed Module information • Shows the basic information about the Communication Module – HS link • Displays the Flag information of a High-speed Link – Autoscan • Displays the Slaves connected to the Pnet master
MasterLogic TroubleShooting
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
28
14
Describe Diagnostics on Interface Modules 4/25/2012
• Detailed Module Information
Basic Module Information
Module Firmware and Hardware Information
MasterLogic TroubleShooting
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
29
Describe Diagnostics on Interface Modules 4/25/2012
Honeywell
AutoScan • Autoscan
– Displays the Slave modules connected to the Pnet interface module Basic Module information
Master information
Module and Link status
Profibus Network Architecture
MasterLogic TroubleShooting
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
30
15
Describe Diagnostics on Interface Modules 4/25/2012
12
Honeywell
Troubleshooting Pnet
Honeywell
LED Indications in Pnet • LED Indications LED Label RUN
I/F
HS
P-RUN
STATUS
ERR
Indications
Actions
ON
Flashing
OFF
Flashing
ON
OFF
High speed link disabled
-
ON
Flashing
ON
ON
ON
ON
Abnormal connection status of a part slave
Check connection / setting of slave
ON
Flashing
Flashing
Flashing
ON
OFF
Change setting of SYCON when high speed link is enabled
-
ON
Flashing
Flashing
Flashing
OFF
ON
Abnormal connection of all slaves
Check connection / setting of slave
OFF
OFF
OFF
-
-
-
Serious fault occurred
Contact customer service center
MasterLogic TroubleShooting
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
31
Describe Diagnostics on Interface Modules 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Troubleshooting Snet • Diagnostic Functions with SoftMaster-NM – Select Online System Diagnosis option in the menu bar of NM – Right click on the Snet module to view the Diagnostic Functions
Module information
Diagnostic Functions
MasterLogic TroubleShooting
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
32
16
Describe Diagnostics on Interface Modules 4/25/2012
• Frame Monitor – Monitors the data frames transmitted and received through Snet communication channels
Basic Information of the module Data format to be displayed in Frame Monitor
Channel selection
Pause monitoring activity
Details of frame data
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
MasterLogic TroubleShooting
33
Describe Diagnostics on Interface Modules 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Frame Monitor Result of the frame
Frame Type Frame Data Time stamp of frame
Length of Frame monitored
MasterLogic TroubleShooting
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
34
17
Describe Diagnostics on Interface Modules 4/25/2012
12
Honeywell
Frame Monitor
Honeywell
Loop Back Test •
Loop Back Test is used to check the operation of the communication port in the Snet module
Link connections Module information
– It is performed without connecting the Snet module to an external device
•
Channel selection
Steps for Loop Back Test – Download the basic parameters into the module – Disable the P2P link – On the hardware channel: • Disconnect channel connection • For RS-232C: link pin-2 and pin-3 • For RS422/485 link TX+ with RX+ and TX- with RX– Select the Channel in the Diagnostic Tool – Select Start
Loop Back Test results
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
MasterLogic TroubleShooting
35
Describe Diagnostics on Interface Modules 4/25/2012
Honeywell
Status by Service • Status by Service Dedicated Service information Basic Module information Read Continuous or Refresh current data
Driver type information
P2P Service information Basic Module information
P2P downloaded parameter and driver type information MasterLogic TroubleShooting
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
36
18
Describe Diagnostics on Interface Modules 4/25/2012
• LED Indications LED Name RUN
I/F
TX
RX
ERR
LED Descriptions Snet operation status
LED status
LED status descriptions
ON
Normal operating
OFF
Abnormal operating of Snet I/F Module
ON
Interface error with CPU module
OFF
Communication module initialization
Flashing
Normal operating
During frame transmission
ON
During frame transmission
OFF
Frame transmission completed
During frame receiving
ON
During frame receiving
OFF
Frame receiving completed
ON
Frame Error
OFF
Normal frame
Interface status with CPU
Frame error
MasterLogic TroubleShooting
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
37
Describe Diagnostics on Interface Modules 4/25/2012
Honeywell
System Logs • System Logs are accessed from SoftMaster – Select Online PLC History from the menu bar
Logs of the Standby [S] PLC
Error, Mode Change, System and Shutdown Logs
Displays information in the selected log
Updates the currently opened log
Displays details of the selected error and a remedy to correct it
Deletes PLC History
MasterLogic TroubleShooting
Reads all LOGS from the PLC Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
38
19
Saves PLC History to a .csv file
Describe Diagnostics on Interface Modules 4/25/2012
12
Honeywell
LED Indications
This page was intentionally left blank.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
13
Describe the ML200R SMART IO Modules
Reference
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
1
Describe the ML200R SMART IO Modules 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Smart I/O: Definition • Smart I/O is an Open-type remote I/O module
• It is connected with a field network for real-time controlling of the I/O modules distributed in a field
• This module may not be available in your region. Consult the Honeywell Representative to check the availability of this module
Reference
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
2
1
Describe the ML200R SMART IO Modules 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Smart I/O: Key Features Key Features • Compact
– Compact design supporting DIN Rail
• Flexible
– Supporting four field networks (Profibus-DP / DeviceNet / Modbus) – Having various I/O modules (16/32 points, DC/Relay/TR type) – Available to systematize other devices in various ways
• Easy
– Setting parameters easily using dedicated configurator (Sycon) or SoftMaster200/100R without additional programming
Reference
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
3
Smart I/O Dimensions: D I/Os
Describe the ML200R SMART IO Modules 2/2/2012
Honeywell
A (Length)
B (Width)
C (Depth) *
16-point I/O
115mm
50mm
39mm
32-point I/O
176mm
50mm
39mm
* Removable type (C, C1): 47.5mm
16-point Module
32-point Module
Reference
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4
2
Describe the ML200R SMART IO Modules 2/2/2012
Smart I/O: Protocol Support Item
Profibus-DP
DeviceNet
Modbus
Protocol
Profibus-DP (RS-485/EN50170)
DeviceNet (CAN)
Modbus (RS-422/485)
Transmission speed
9.6kbps~12Mbps
125/250/500kbps
2.4kbps~38.4kbps
Transmission Distance
100m~1.2km
500/250/125m (Thincable:100m)
500m
Topology
BUS
Trunk & Drop
BUS
Transmission Method
Token pass & Master/Slave (Poll)
CSMA/NBA (Poll Cyclic,COS,Strobe)
Master/Slave (Poll)
Max. number of stations
32 sta./segment (sta. #: 1~99)
64 stations
32 stations
Link Capacity
1K/master:PUEA 7K/master:PUEB
2,048pt./Master
64pt./station
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Reference
Describe the ML200R SMART IO Modules 2/2/2012
5
Honeywell
Smart I/O: Physical Details - Profibus DP D I/O’s Designation
Details
1
9-PIN Plug
2
Label of Smart I/O
Display the Part name of the Smart I/O
3
Communication LED’s
Display the status of the communication module (Rx,Tx & Pwr)
4
Address Switch
For setting the Station Address ( X16 and X1)
5
LED Channel Status
For displaying the channel status (ON/OFF)
6
Hook
For Mounting the Module
7
Terminal Block
For connection of the field I/O’s and Power Supply
Reference
Connector for connecting with the communication module
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
6
3
Describe the ML200R SMART IO Modules 2/2/2012
13
Honeywell
Honeywell
Smart I/O: Physical Details (Profibus Analog Module) Designation
Details
1
9-PIN Plug
Connector for connecting with the communication module
2
Label of Smart I/O
Display the Part name of the Smart I/O
3
Communication LED’s
Display the status of the communication module (Rx,Tx & Pwr)
4
Address Switch
For setting the Station Address ( X16 and X1)
5
Hook
For Mounting the Module
6
Terminal Block
For connection of field I/O’s and Power Supply
1
4
3
2
6
5 Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Reference
Describe the ML200R SMART IO Modules 2/2/2012
7
Honeywell
Smart I/O: Comparison Analog I/Os-Profibus DP Analog Input
Analog Output
MPL-AV8C
MPL-AC8C
MPL-DV4C
MPL-DC4C
Voltage
Current
Voltage
Current
Type Protocol
Profibus-DP
Channels
8
4
Analog Range
±10V
0~10 V
0~5V 1~5V
±20mA
0~20mA, 4~20mA
±10V
0~10 V
0~5V 1~5V
Digital Range
-8000 ~ 8000
0 ~ 8000
0 ~ 4000
-8000 ~ 8000
0 ~ 8000
-8000 ~ 8000
0 ~ 8000
0 ~ 4000
Resolution
16Bit
4~20mA, 0~20mA 0 ~ 8000
16Bit
Accuracy Ambient
±0.3%
±0.3%
±0.3％
±0.3％
Operation
±0.3%
±0.4%
±0.3%
±0.4%
Max. Input
Voltage: 15V
Current: ±30 ㎃
Insulation Reference
Non-insulation between channel Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
8
4
Non-insulation between channel Describe the ML200R SMART IO Modules 2/2/2012
13
Describe Basics of Ladder Programming
Reference
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
9
Describe Basics of Ladder Programming 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
• Ladder diagram is used for schematic representation of control wiring diagram – Most commonly used programming language in a PLC – Represents a program in graphical diagram – Resembles a ladder with the two vertical power rails and horizontal rungs Rung
(Phase/+) Power supply rail (Neutral/-)
Reference
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
10
5
Describe Basics of Ladder Programming 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Ladder Diagram For Lamp Control
• Ladder diagram to control the Lamp using a switch is shown below
24VDC
Lamp 1
Switch 1
L1
L2
• In a ladder diagram, the output is always present at the extreme right corner – Neutral/Negative of Output is connected to ground (explained in next slide)
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Reference
11
Describe Basics of Ladder Programming 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Ladder Diagram For Lamp Control
• If the lamp is connected to the left side, accidental ground will produce a False output – Accidental ground in the below case will cause the lamp to glow even if the switch is open 24VDC
L1
Switch 1
Lamp 1
L2
• If the lamp is connected to the right side, accidental ground cannot produce a False output – Accidental ground in the below case will cause the fuse to blow off if the switch is in close position 24VDC
L1
Reference
Lamp 1
Switch 1
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
12
6
L2
Describe Basics of Ladder Programming 2/2/2012
Honeywell
-
Normally open contact
-
Normally closed contact
P
-
Positive transition-sensing contact
N
-
Negative transition-sensing contact
-
Coil
-
Negated coil
S
-
Set coil
R
-
Reset coil
P
-
Positive transition-sensing coil
N
-
Negative transition-sensing coil
Reference
13
Coils and Contacts
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Describe Basics of Ladder Programming 2/2/2012
13
Honeywell
Logic Gates using Ladder Diagram •
Ladder Diagram for OR gate – Lamp L1 will energized if either A or B is ON
•
Ladder Diagram for AND gate – Lamp L1 will energized if both A and B are ON
Reference
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
14
7
A
B
Output
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
A
B
Output
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
Describe Basics of Ladder Programming 2/2/2012
Sample Logic For Bi-Directional Motor Control
Honeywell
• Basic ladder to run a motor in Forward or Reverse direction have a Forward Pushbutton (FPB) and a Reverse Pushbutton (RPB)
– MF and MR are latches provided for Forward and Reverse Push button
Latch
• Drawback of the circuit
– No provision to prevent a second command when the motor is running in other direction
Reference
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
15
Describe Basics of Ladder Programming 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Sample Logic – Motor Control
• Ladder diagram shown below prevents a second command when motor is running in one direction
Prevents Forward command if motor running in reverse direction
Prevents Reverse command if motor running in Forward direction
• Drawback of the circuit
– No provision to stop the motor
Reference
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
16
8
Describe Basics of Ladder Programming 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Motor Control – Stop Command • Ladder diagram shown below includes a Stop command
13
– Normally closed contact is used for stop pushbutton
Contact opens when the Stop Pushbutton is pressed
• Drawback of the circuit – No provision to trip the motor in case of overload
Reference
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
17
Describe Basics of Ladder Programming 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Motor Control – Overload Protection • Ladder diagram shown below includes a Overload signal – Prevents motor from running in case of overload
Trips the motor when contact is open
Reference
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
18
9
Describe Basics of Ladder Programming 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Motor Control – Final Logic • Final ladder diagram has the following features – – – –
Separate latching command for forward and reverse running Prevention from second command if motor is running Stop command Protection from overload
Reference
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
19
Describe Basics of Ladder Programming 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Fail Safe Design
• Consider fire alarm system with four smoke detectors (FS1 to FS4) and a Fire Siren (FA) – If any smoke detector detects, then the fire siren must turn ON
• The ladder diagram shown here meets the requirement but is not Fail safe – In case there is discontinuity in connection, the siren will not blow even if the smoke detector detects a fire condition
Wire break
Switch activated but Siren is inactive due to wire break Reference
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
20
10
Describe Basics of Ladder Programming 2/2/2012
Honeywell
Fail Safe Design
– Normally close contact of all the smoke detector switches are connected in series – Siren will blow in two conditions • Actual smoke detected even by one of the detector • Wire break even in any one of the detector (Fail Safe)
Break in FS1 causes Flag to deactivate and Fire alarm will blow
Reference
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
21
Describe Basics of Ladder Programming 2/2/2012
Honeywell
This page intentionally left blank
Reference
Honeywell Confidential Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
22
11
Describe Basics of Ladder Programming 2/2/2012
13
• The ladder diagram shown here meets the logical requirement and is Fail safe
This page was intentionally left blank.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
Topic: Reference Contents Create a User Defined Function Block to Scale Analog Input ...............................................................3
13
Display the Temperature Value in BCD Display ..................................................................................21
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
1
This page was intentionally left blank.
2
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
Reference Create a User Defined Function Block to Scale Analog Input
Create a User Defined Function Block to Scale Analog Input Practice Objective
13
The objective of this lab is to create a user-defined function block to scale the Analog Input and show the actual value.
Prerequisites •
SoftMaster is installed and configured
•
USB cable is connected between ML200R and Experion Server node
Introduction •
For scaling the input, use the following formula: Y = (((Y2 – Y1) / (X2 – X1))* (X – X1)) + Y1
Where, •
Y = Scaled Output
•
Y2 = Maximum Temperature Range.
•
Y1 = Minimum Temperature Range.
•
X2 = Maximum Count in ML.
•
X1 = Minimum Count in ML.
•
X = Input Received from Field
•
In class, we will use the Potentiometer in the kit to provide the Analog Input.
•
The potentiometer input is connected to Channel 0 of the 2MLF-AC8A I/O module in the kit.
•
Assume the range of analog input as 0 to 100 m3/hr and Count range as 0 to 16000
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
3
Reference Create a User Defined Function Block to Scale Analog Input
Procedures
Step
Action
Create User Defined Function Block. 1 ATTENTION This lab is performed on Physical Hardware. Students must perform this lab sequentially (one at a time). Check with the instructor to ensure that the controller is free before performing the download operation.
4
2
Open SoftMaster if not already open.
3
From the Project Menu in SoftMaster, select “New Project…”
4
Enter the following information in the New Project dialog box: Project Name
: Input Scaling
PLC Series
: ML-200 R
Program Name
: Ladder_Program
Program Language
: LD
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
Reference Create a User Defined Function Block to Scale Analog Input Step
Action
5
In the Project Window, select and right-click on User Function/Function Block.
6
Select Add Item Function Block…
13
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
5
Reference Create a User Defined Function Block to Scale Analog Input
Step 7
Action In the User Function/Function Block window, enter the following details: Program name: SCALING Language: LD Select the Use EN/ENO checkbox Retain the default settings and click OK
6
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
Reference Create a User Defined Function Block to Scale Analog Input
Step
In the Project Window of SoftMaster, double-click Local Variables present in the SCALING function block which we have created.
13
8
Action
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
7
Reference Create a User Defined Function Block to Scale Analog Input
Step 9
8
Action Create the local Variables as described in the table below. Variable Kind
Variable Name
Type
Comment
VAR_INPUT
X
INT
Input from Field
VAR_INPUT
Y1
REAL
Minimum Range of the Input
VAR_INPUT
Y2
REAL
Maximum Range of the Input
VAR_INPUT
X1
REAL
Min. Count in ML
VAR_INPUT
X2
REAL
Max. Count in ML
VAR_OUTPUT
Y
REAL
Scaled Output in Engineering Units
VAR
X_REAL
REAL
Input from field in Real units
VAR
TEMP_SUB_1
REAL
Temporary Variable to store output of Y2-Y1 value
VAR
TEMP_SUB_2
REAL
Temporary Variable to store output of X2-X1 value
VAR
TEMP_DIV
REAL
Temporary Variable to store output of (Y2-Y1)/(X2-X1) value
VAR
TEMP_SUB_3
REAL
Temporary Variable to store output of X-X1 value
VAR
TEMP_MUL
REAL
Temporary Variable to store output of ((Y2-Y1)/(X2-X1)) * (X-X1) value
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
Reference Create a User Defined Function Block to Scale Analog Input Step
Action
10
In the Project Window, double-click Program present in the SCALING function block.
11
Select F10 from the LD Toolbar and click on the Program window.
12
In the Function/Function Block dialog, enter the name as SUB and click search.
13
Select SUB in the Function list and click OK.
13
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
9
Reference Create a User Defined Function Block to Scale Analog Input
10
Step
Action
14
In the Program Window, connect the EN pin directly with a horizontal line. Double-click on the empty space next to the IN1 parameter in SUB block.
15
In the Select Variable window select Local Variable from the Variable List. In the Local Variable list, select Y1 and click OK.
16
Repeat Steps 13 and 14 to assign Y2 variable to IN2 parameter and TEMP_SUB_1 variable to OUT parameter.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
Reference Create a User Defined Function Block to Scale Analog Input Step
Action
17
Repeat Steps 10 to 14 to add another SUB block and INT_TO_*** block and assign the variables as shown below.
18
Repeat Steps 10 to 14 to add SUB and DIV block and assign the variables as shown below.
13
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
11
Reference Create a User Defined Function Block to Scale Analog Input
12
Step
Action
19
Repeat Steps 10 to 14 to add MUL and ADD block and assign the variables as shown below.
20
In the Project window, double-click on I/O parameter and configure the FENet module in Base00 and other I/O modules in Base01.
21
In the Project window, double-click on Program option present in Ladder_Program.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
Reference Create a User Defined Function Block to Scale Analog Input
2/2/2012
Step
Action
22
Select F10 from the LD Toolbar and click on the Program window.
23
In the Function/Function Block dialog, select in the category and then select SCALING from the Function List. Click OK.
24
In the Select Variable dialog box, click OK. In the Variable Name Add dialog box, click OK.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
13
13
Reference Create a User Defined Function Block to Scale Analog Input
14
Step
Action
25
In the Program Window, connect the EN pin directly with a horizontal line. Double-click on the empty space next to the X parameter in SCALING block.
26
In the Select Variable dialog box, select the Global Variable option. In the Global Variable List select Base01, Slot02: 2MLF-AC8A (Current, 8-CH) and then select 0102_CH0_DATA variable. Click OK.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
Reference Create a User Defined Function Block to Scale Analog Input Step
Action
27
Double-click on the empty space next to the X1 parameter. In the Select Variable dialog box, enter the value as 0 and click OK.
28
Repeat step 26 to assign the values for X2, Y1, Y2 parameters as shown below.
29
Double-click on the empty space next to the Y parameter. In the Select Variable dialog box, select New Variable button.
13
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
15
Reference Create a User Defined Function Block to Scale Analog Input
Step 30
Action In the Variable Name to Add dialog box, enter/select the following: Variable Name: Value_In_Eng_Units Data Type: REAL Address: %MD10 Retain the default values for other parameters and click OK.
16
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
Reference Create a User Defined Function Block to Scale Analog Input Step
Action
31
Ensure that the Value_In_Eng_Units variable is selected and click OK in the Select Variable dialog box.
32
Save the Program.
33
Double-click on I/O Parameter in the Project window. In the I/O Parameter Setting dialog box, expand Base 01 and then double-click on 2MLF-AC8A (Current, 8-CH).
13
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
17
Reference Create a User Defined Function Block to Scale Analog Input
Step
Action
34
In the Module properties dialog, select the Channel status as Enable for CH0. Retain the default settings for other parameters and click OK.
35
Click OK in the I/O Parameter Setting dialog box.
36
Connect and write the program/parameters to the ML200R CPU.
ATTENTION Connect and Write options are available in the Online menu. Before connecting to the ML, ensure that ML is connected through USB or Ethernet.
18
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
Reference Create a User Defined Function Block to Scale Analog Input
Step Select Monitor Start Monitoring.
13
37
Action
ATTENTION The value in the output is displayed exponentially. For example, the value which is displayed above in the screen capture must be read as 0.05625.
38
2/2/2012
Increase/Decrease the value by adjusting the Potentiometer in the kit. Ensure that the value in the program varies proportionally based on the input provided.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
19
Reference Create a User Defined Function Block to Scale Analog Input
This page was intentionally left blank.
20
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
Reference Display the Temperature Value in BCD Display
Display the Temperature Value in BCD Display Practice Objective
13
The objective of this lab is to create a read the temperature value using RTD and display it in a BCD display. Prerequisites •
SoftMaster is installed and configured
•
USB cable is connected between ML200R and Experion Server node
Introduction In this lab you will perform the following: •
Read the Input from RTD
•
Use the user-defined function block which was created in the previous lab to scale the input
•
Make the appropriate data conversions and display it in BCD display in the kit
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
21
Reference Display the Temperature Value in BCD Display
Procedures
Step
Action
1 ATTENTION This lab is performed on Physical Hardware. Students must perform this lab sequentially (one at a time). Check with the instructor and ensure that the controller is free before performing the download operation.
22
2
Open SoftMaster and open the Input_Scaling program if not already open.
3
In the Project window, right click on Scan Program and select Add Item Program.
4
Enter the Program name as Temperature_Display. Ensure that LD is selected as Language and click OK.
5
Double click on Program option in the Project Window which is present under the Temperature_Display.
6
Select F10 from the LD Toolbar and click on the Program window.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
Reference Display the Temperature Value in BCD Display Step
Action
7
In the Function/Function Block dialog, select in the category and then select SCALING from the Function List. Click OK.
8
In the Select Variable dialog box, click OK. In the Variable Name Add dialog box, click OK.
9
In the Program Window, connect the EN pin directly with a horizontal line. Double click on the empty space next to the X parameter in SCALING block.
13
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
23
Reference Display the Temperature Value in BCD Display
24
Step
Action
10
In the Select Variable dialog box, select the Global Variable option. In the Global Variable List select Base01, Slot04: 2MLF-RD4A (RTD, 4-CH) and then select 0104_CH0_TEMP variable. Click OK.
11
Double click on the empty space next to the X1 parameter. In the Select Variable dialog box, enter the value as 0 and click OK.
12
Repeat step 11 to assign the values for X2, Y1, Y2 parameters as shown below.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
Reference Display the Temperature Value in BCD Display
Step
Action
13
Double click on the empty space next to the Y parameter. In the Select Variable dialog box, select New Variable button.
14
In the Variable Name to Add dialog box, enter/select the following: Variable Name: Actual_Temperature Data Type: REAL
13
Address: %MD20 Retain the default values for other parameters and click OK.
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
25
Reference Display the Temperature Value in BCD Display
26
Step
Action
15
Ensure that the Actual Temperature variable is selected and click OK in the Select Variable dialog box.
16
Select F9 and click in the empty space below the SCALING block. In the Select Variable dialog box, select Global Variable and enter _0103_CH0_OUTEN as Variable name. Click OK.
17
Select F10 from the LD Toolbar and click on the Program window.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
Reference Display the Temperature Value in BCD Display Step
Action
18
In the Function/Function Block dialog, enter the name as REAL_TO_*** and click search.
19
Select REAL_TO_*** in the Function list and click OK.
20
In the Program Window, connect the EN pin directly with a horizontal line. Double click on the empty space next to the IN parameter in REAL_TO_*** block.
21
In the Select Variable window select Local Variable from the Variable List. In the Local Variable list, select Actual_Temperature and click OK.
13
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
27
Reference Display the Temperature Value in BCD Display
Step
Action
22
Double click on the empty space next to the OUT parameter in REAL_TO_*** block and enter %MW30 in the variable name. Click OK in the select Variable dialog box.
23
Repeat steps 17 to 21 and add a ***_TO_BCD function block with the variables as shown below.
ATTENTION %QW1.1.1 is the address for BCD display which is present in kit.
28
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
Reference Display the Temperature Value in BCD Display
Step
Double click on I/O Parameter in the Project window. In the I/O Parameter Setting dialog box, expand Base 01 and then double click on 2MLF-RD4A (RTD, 4-CH).
13
24
Action
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
29
Reference Display the Temperature Value in BCD Display
Step 25
Action In the Module properties dialog, select the Channel status as Enable for CH0. Retain the default settings for other parameters and click OK.
ATTENTION For training purpose, we are retaining the default settings. In an actual plant, parameters of the RTD must be entered here.
26
Click OK in the I/O Parameter Setting dialog box.
27
Connect and write the program/parameters to the ML200R CPU.
ATTENTION Connect and Write options are available in the Online menu. Before connecting to the ML, ensure that ML is connected through USB or Ethernet.
30
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
Reference Display the Temperature Value in BCD Display
Step 28
Action BCD display in the kit will now display the temperature. Rub the RTD physically and check whether the temperature value is increasing in the BCD display
ATTENTION
2/2/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
13
The temperature shown here might not be actual temperature. For training purpose, we have reduced the count during scaling in order to view the small temperature changes. In actual plant scenario, you must use the Count as 16000 or 32000 and the device range must the actual range supported by the device.
31
Reference Display the Temperature Value in BCD Display
This page was intentionally left blank.
32
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
2/2/2012
EXAMINATION
ML1001R400-Test 01_MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation 1
Points: 1.00 Which of the following special purpose modules is used for recording of events? A.
Analog Input
B.
DISOE
C.
Temperature measuring
D.
High Speed Counter Points: 1.00
Which one of the following statements is TRUE for the Input Filter settings in DISOE Module? A.
Input Filter >= Chattering time interval / Events (No.)
B.
Input Filter = Chattering time interval / Events (No.)
C.
Input Filter
